Commit graph

18069 commits

Author SHA1 Message Date
David Rowley
d010cc6cca Doc: fix incorrect punctuation
Author: Noboru Saito <noborusai@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAM3qnJtv5YbjpwDfVOYN2gZ9zGSLFM1UGJgptSXmwfifOZJFQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 17
2025-04-22 11:04:04 +12:00
Fujii Masao
706cbed351 doc: Fix memory context level in pg_log_backend_memory_contexts() example.
Commit d9e03864b6 changed the memory context level numbers shown by
pg_log_backend_memory_contexts() to be 1-based. However, the example in
the documentation was not updated and still used 0-based numbering.

This commit updates the example to match the current 1-based output.

Author: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <drowleyml@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1ad6d388-1b43-400d-bec9-36d52f755f74@oss.nttdata.com
2025-04-21 14:53:25 +09:00
Michael Paquier
88e947136b Fix typos and grammar in the code
The large majority of these have been introduced by recent commits done
in the v18 development cycle.

Author: Alexander Lakhin <exclusion@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9a7763ab-5252-429d-a943-b28941e0e28b@gmail.com
2025-04-19 19:17:42 +09:00
Tatsuo Ishii
05883bd6e5 Doc: fix missing comma at the end of a line.
Backpatch to 17, where the line was added.

Reported by Noboru Saito while he was working on translating the file
into Japanese.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20250417.203047.1321297410457834775.ishii%40postgresql.org
Reported-by: Noboru Saito <noborusai@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafs <daniel@yesql.se>
Backpatch-through: 17
2025-04-18 09:38:46 +09:00
Daniel Gustafsson
5ee476294c doc: Fix typos in documentation
This fixes a set of typos introduced during the v18 development
cycle.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7038B4C5-2742-42B1-A8F0-0FFEAECF02A7@yesql.se
2025-04-15 21:32:18 +02:00
Fujii Masao
f840f8ee30 doc: Fix missing whitespace in pg_restore documentation.
Previously, a space was missing between "<option>--exclude-schema</option>"
and "for" in the pg_restore documentation. This commit fixes the typo by
adding the missing whitespace.

Back-patch to v17 where the typo was added.

Author: Lele Gaifax <lele@metapensiero.it>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87lds3ysm0.fsf@metapensiero.it
Backpatch-through: 17
2025-04-15 23:15:06 +09:00
David Rowley
b51f86e49a Doc: use "an SQL" consistently rather than "a SQL"
Per the precedent set by 04539e73f, adjust article prefixes for "SQL" to
use "an" consistently rather than "a", i.e., "an es-que-ell" rather than
"a sequel".

Both of these are new to v18. Also see b1b13d2b5, d866f0374 and
7bdd489d3.
2025-04-14 11:55:18 +12:00
Tom Lane
78637a8be2 Doc: do a little copy-editing on Index Storage Parameters list.
Add a paragraph break per suggestion from David G. Johnston.
Use a consistent voice for all the different parameter
descriptions, and fix a couple of grammatical issues.

Reported-by: Igor Korot <ikorot01@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+FnnTz=EW1VQRpWB9J+G-NSchrPFcw4nR7d0JqzEK9jWKB35A@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-12 13:42:31 -04:00
Daniel Gustafsson
847bbb21f8 Fix recently introduced typos
This fixes typos in docs and comments introduced during the v18
development cycle, to keep them from ending up in backbranches.

Author: Jacob Brazeal <jacob.brazeal@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+COZaCgGua25f2hSrjrDLJcJJAHkwoKgTTqUy-wyL1=64JNjw@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-11 22:17:12 +02:00
Nathan Bossart
5822bf21d5 Add missing space in pg_restore documentation.
Oversight in commit 1495eff7bd.
2025-04-11 10:05:32 -05:00
Tom Lane
d89335eea6 Doc: remove long-obsolete advice about generated constraint names.
It's been twenty years since we generated constraint names that
look like "$N".  So this advice about double-quoting such names
is well past its sell-by date, and now it merely seems confusing.

Reported-by: Yaroslav Saburov <y.saburov@gmail.com>
Author: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/174393459040.678.17810152410419444783@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-04-10 14:49:10 -04:00
Amit Kapila
d438515c29 Cosmetic fixes for pg_createsubscriber's -all option.
Author: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PsmSCQ-ENSDQ0YOUcsgzT=GG-E9jyXBvxd51A_dMXH5XA@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-10 10:30:05 +05:30
Tom Lane
b1720fe63f Move contrib/spi testing from core regression tests to contrib/spi.
It's weird to have the core regression tests depending on contrib
code, and coverage testing shows that those test queries add nothing
to the core-code coverage of the core tests.  So pull those test bits
out and put them into ordinary test scripts inside contrib/spi/,
making that more like other contrib modules.

Aside from being structurally nicer, anything we can take out of the
core tests (which are executed multiple times per check-world run)
and put into tests executed only once should be a win.  It doesn't
look like this change will buy a whole lot of milliseconds, but a
cycle saved is a cycle earned.

Also, there is some discussion around possibly removing refint and/or
autoinc altogether.  I don't know if that will happen, but we'd
certainly need to decouple them from the core tests to do so.

The tests for autoinc were quite intertwined with the undocumented
"ttdummy" trigger in regress.c.  That made the tests very hard to
understand and contributed nothing to autoinc's testing either.
So I just deleted ttdummy and rewrote the autoinc tests without it.

I realized while doing this that the description of autoinc in
the SGML docs is not a great description of what the function
actually does, so the patch includes some updates to those docs.

Author: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3872677.1744077559@sss.pgh.pa.us
2025-04-08 19:12:03 -04:00
Tomas Vondra
91f1fe90c7 pg_buffercache: Change page_num type to bigint
The page_num was defined as integer, which should be sufficient for the
near future (with 4K pages it's 8TB). But it's virtually free to return
bigint, and get a wider range. This was agreed on the thread, but I
forgot to tweak this in ba2a3c2302.

While at it, make the data types in CREATE VIEW a bit more consistent.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmxh6KWo0aqRqvmcoaX2jUxZYb4kGp3N%3Dq1w%2BDiH-696Xw%40mail.gmail.co
2025-04-08 12:38:42 +02:00
Tomas Vondra
b8a6078ca8 doc: Correct pg_shmem_allocations_numa.size data type
The code in pg_get_shmem_allocations_numa() returned 'size' as int64,
but the docs said int32.

Report and fix by Noriyoshi Shinoda.

Reported-by: Noriyoshi Shinoda <noriyoshi.shinoda@hpe.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DM4PR84MB1734308EB741A6ECFF040C27EEAA2@DM4PR84MB1734.NAMPRD84.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
2025-04-08 12:36:36 +02:00
Thomas Munro
7ea21f4ee2 Fix typo in docs.
Typo in previous commit.
2025-04-08 22:02:45 +12:00
Thomas Munro
f78ca6f3eb Introduce file_copy_method setting.
It can be set to either COPY (the default) or CLONE if the system
supports it.  CLONE causes callers of copydir(), currently CREATE
DATABASE ... STRATEGY=FILE_COPY and ALTER DATABASE ... SET TABLESPACE =
..., to use copy_file_range (Linux, FreeBSD) or copyfile (macOS) to copy
files instead of a read-write loop over the contents.

CLONE gives the kernel the opportunity to share block ranges on
copy-on-write file systems and push copying down to storage on others,
depending on configuration.  On some systems CLONE can be used to clone
large databases quickly with CREATE DATABASE ... TEMPLATE=source
STRATEGY=FILE_COPY.

Other operating systems could be supported; patches welcome.

Co-authored-by: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ranier Vilela <ranier.vf@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLM%2Bt%2BSwBU-cHeMUXJCOgBxSHLGZutV5zCwY4qrCcE02w%40mail.gmail.com
2025-04-08 21:35:38 +12:00
Daniel Gustafsson
042a66291b Add function to get memory context stats for processes
This adds a function for retrieving memory context statistics
and information from backends as well as auxiliary processes.
The intended usecase is cluster debugging when under memory
pressure or unanticipated memory usage characteristics.

When calling the function it sends a signal to the specified
process to submit statistics regarding its memory contexts
into dynamic shared memory.  Each memory context is returned
in detail, followed by a cumulative total in case the number
of contexts exceed the max allocated amount of shared memory.
Each process is limited to use at most 1Mb memory for this.

A summary can also be explicitly requested by the user, this
will return the TopMemoryContext and a cumulative total of
all lower contexts.

In order to not block on busy processes the caller specifies
the number of seconds during which to retry before timing out.
In the case where no statistics are published within the set
timeout,  the last known statistics are returned, or NULL if
no previously published statistics exist.  This allows dash-
board type queries to continually publish even if the target
process is temporarily congested.  Context records contain a
timestamp to indicate when they were submitted.

Author: Rahila Syed <rahilasyed90@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Reviewed-by: Atsushi Torikoshi <torikoshia@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2L28v8mc9HDt8QoSJ8TRmKau_8FM_HKS41NeO9-6ZAkuZKXw@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-08 11:06:56 +02:00
Andres Freund
dcf7e1697b Add pg_buffercache_evict_{relation,all} functions
In addition to the added functions, the pg_buffercache_evict() function now
shows whether the buffer was flushed.

pg_buffercache_evict_relation(): Evicts all shared buffers in a
relation at once.
pg_buffercache_evict_all(): Evicts all shared buffers at once.

Both functions provide mechanism to evict multiple shared buffers at
once. They are designed to address the inefficiency of repeatedly calling
pg_buffercache_evict() for each individual buffer, which can be time-consuming
when dealing with large shared buffer pools. (e.g., ~477ms vs. ~2576ms for
16GB of fully populated shared buffers).

These functions are intended for developer testing and debugging
purposes and are available to superusers only.

Minimal tests for the new functions are included. Also, there was no test for
pg_buffercache_evict(), test for this added too.

No new extension version is needed, as it was already increased this release
by ba2a3c2302.

Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Aidar Imamov <a.imamov@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Joseph Koshakow <koshy44@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ0h_YoSqqutxV6DES1RW8ig6wcA8CR9rJk358YRMxZFmw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-04-08 02:19:32 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
46b4ba533c Fix PG 17 [NOT] NULL optimization bug for domains
A PG 17 optimization allowed columns with NOT NULL constraints to skip
table scans for IS NULL queries, and to skip IS NOT NULL checks for IS
NOT NULL queries.  This didn't work for domain types, since domain types
don't follow the IS NULL/IS NOT NULL constraint logic.  To fix, disable
this optimization for domains for PG 17+.

Reported-by: Jan Behrens

Diagnosed-by: Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z37p0paENWWUarj-@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 17
2025-04-07 21:33:42 -04:00
Tomas Vondra
ba2a3c2302 Add pg_buffercache_numa view with NUMA node info
Introduces a new view pg_buffercache_numa, showing NUMA memory nodes
for individual buffers. For each buffer the view returns an entry for
each memory page, with the associated NUMA node.

The database blocks and OS memory pages may have different size - the
default block size is 8KB, while the memory page is 4K (on x86). But
other combinations are possible, depending on configure parameters,
platform, etc. This means buffers may overlap with multiple memory
pages, each associated with a different NUMA node.

To determine the NUMA node for a buffer, we first need to touch the
memory pages using pg_numa_touch_mem_if_required, otherwise we might get
status -2 (ENOENT = The page is not present), indicating the page is
either unmapped or unallocated.

The view may be relatively expensive, especially when accessed for the
first time in a backend, as it touches all memory pages to get reliable
information about the NUMA node. This may also force allocation of the
shared memory.

Author: Jakub Wartak <jakub.wartak@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmxh6KWo0aqRqvmcoaX2jUxZYb4kGp3N%3Dq1w%2BDiH-696Xw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-04-07 23:08:17 +02:00
Tomas Vondra
8cc139bec3 Introduce pg_shmem_allocations_numa view
Introduce new pg_shmem_alloctions_numa view with information about how
shared memory is distributed across NUMA nodes. For each shared memory
segment, the view returns one row for each NUMA node backing it, with
the total amount of memory allocated from that node.

The view may be relatively expensive, especially when executed for the
first time in a backend, as it has to touch all memory pages to get
reliable information about the NUMA node. This may also force allocation
of the shared memory.

Unlike pg_shmem_allocations, the view does not show anonymous shared
memory allocations. It also does not show memory allocated using the
dynamic shared memory infrastructure.

Author: Jakub Wartak <jakub.wartak@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmxh6KWo0aqRqvmcoaX2jUxZYb4kGp3N%3Dq1w%2BDiH-696Xw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-04-07 23:08:17 +02:00
Tomas Vondra
65c298f61f Add support for basic NUMA awareness
Add basic NUMA awareness routines, using a minimal src/port/pg_numa.c
portability wrapper and an optional build dependency, enabled by
--with-libnuma configure option. For now this is Linux-only, other
platforms may be supported later.

A built-in SQL function pg_numa_available() allows checking NUMA
support, i.e. that the server was built/linked with the NUMA library.

The main function introduced is pg_numa_query_pages(), which allows
determining the NUMA node for individual memory pages. Internally the
function uses move_pages(2) syscall, as it allows batching, and is more
efficient than get_mempolicy(2).

Author: Jakub Wartak <jakub.wartak@enterprisedb.com>
Co-authored-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmxh6KWo0aqRqvmcoaX2jUxZYb4kGp3N%3Dq1w%2BDiH-696Xw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-04-07 23:08:17 +02:00
Tom Lane
8cfbdf8f4d Fix some issues in contrib/spi/refint.c.
check_foreign_key incorrectly used a single cache entry for its saved
plans for a 'c' (cascade) trigger, although there are two different
queries to execute depending on whether it fires for an update or a
delete.  This caused the wrong things to be done if both types of
event occur in one session.  (This was indeed visible in the triggers
regression test, but apparently nobody ever questioned it.)  To fix,
add the operation type to the cache key.

Its debug log output failed to distinguish update from delete
events, too.

Also, change the intended trigger usage from BEFORE ROW to AFTER ROW,
and add checks insisting on that usage.  BEFORE is really rather
unsafe, since if there are other BEFORE triggers they might change or
cancel the operation we are trying to check.  AFTER triggers are the
standard way to propagate changes to other rows, so we should follow
that way here.

In passing, remove a useless duplicate lookup of the cache entry.

This code is mostly intended as a documentation example, so we
won't consider a back-patch.

Author: Dmitrii Bondar <d.bondar@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Paul Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Lilian Ontowhee <ontowhee@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/79755a2b18ed4fe5e29da6a87a1e00d1@postgrespro.ru
2025-04-07 15:54:16 -04:00
Masahiko Sawada
a13d49014d doc: Fix a typo in pg_recvlogical documentation.
Oversight in cf2655a902.

Author: Zhijie Hou <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS3PR01MB5718DD1466E2B9043448AE5094AA2@OS3PR01MB5718.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2025-04-07 12:13:08 -07:00
Álvaro Herrera
a379061a22
Allow NOT NULL constraints to be added as NOT VALID
This allows them to be added without scanning the table, and validating
them afterwards without holding access exclusive lock on the table after
any violating rows have been deleted or fixed.

Doing ALTER TABLE ... SET NOT NULL for a column that has an invalid
not-null constraint validates that constraint.  ALTER TABLE .. VALIDATE
CONSTRAINT is also supported.  There are various checks on whether an
invalid constraint is allowed in a child table when the parent table has
a valid constraint; this should match what we do for enforced/not
enforced constraints.

pg_attribute.attnotnull is now only an indicator for whether a not-null
constraint exists for the column; whether it's valid or invalid must be
queried in pg_constraint.  Applications can continue to query
pg_attribute.attnotnull as before, but now it's possible that NULL rows
are present in the column even when that's set to true.

For backend internal purposes, we cache the nullability status in
CompactAttribute->attnullability that each tuple descriptor carries
(replacing CompactAttribute.attnotnull, which was a mirror of
Form_pg_attribute.attnotnull).  During the initial tuple descriptor
creation, based on the pg_attribute scan, we set this to UNRESTRICTED if
pg_attribute.attnotnull is false, or to UNKNOWN if it's true; then we
update the latter to VALID or INVALID depending on the pg_constraint
scan.  This flag is also copied when tupledescs are copied.

Comparing tuple descs for equality must also compare the
CompactAttribute.attnullability flag and return false in case of a
mismatch.

pg_dump deals with these constraints by storing the OIDs of invalid
not-null constraints in a separate array, and running a query to obtain
their properties.  The regular table creation SQL omits them entirely.
They are then dealt with in the same way as "separate" CHECK
constraints, and dumped after the data has been loaded.  Because no
additional pg_dump infrastructure was required, we don't bump its
version number.

I decided not to bump catversion either, because the old catalog state
works perfectly in the new world.  (Trying to run with new catalog state
and the old server version would likely run into issues, however.)

System catalogs do not support invalid not-null constraints (because
commit 14e87ffa5c didn't allow them to have pg_constraint rows
anyway.)

Author: Rushabh Lathia <rushabh.lathia@gmail.com>
Author: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Tested-by: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGPqQf0KitkNack4F5CFkFi-9Dqvp29Ro=EpcWt=4_hs-Rt+bQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-07 19:19:50 +02:00
Tom Lane
3516ea768c Add local-address escape "%L" to log_line_prefix.
This escape shows the numeric server IP address that the client
has connected to.  Unix-socket connections will show "[local]".
Non-client processes (e.g. background processes) will show "[none]".

We expect that this option will be of interest to only a fairly
small number of users.  Therefore the implementation is optimized
for the case where it's not used (that is, we don't do the string
conversion until we have to), and we've not added the field to
csvlog or jsonlog formats.

Author: Greg Sabino Mullane <htamfids@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Cary Huang <cary.huang@highgo.ca>
Reviewed-by: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-by: Jim Jones <jim.jones@uni-muenster.de>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKAnmmK-U+UicE-qbNU23K--Q5XTLdM6bj+gbkZBZkjyjrd3Ow@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-07 11:06:05 -04:00
Daniel Gustafsson
a233a603ba doc: Clarify project naming
Clarify the project naming in the history section of the docs
to match the recent license preamble changes.

Backpatch to all supported versions.

Author: Dave Page <dpage@pgadmin.org>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+OCxozLzK2+Jc14XZyWXSp6L9Ot+3efwXUE35FJG=fsbib2EA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-04-07 00:03:18 +02:00
Tom Lane
218ab68275 Doc: fix PDF "contents ... exceed the available area" warnings.
Tweak column widths in a new table, similarly to some previous
fixes such as b62381d9a.

Per buildfarm.
2025-04-06 16:27:39 -04:00
Álvaro Herrera
749a9e20c9
Add modern SHA-2 based password hashes to pgcrypto.
This adapts the publicly available reference implementation on
https://www.akkadia.org/drepper/SHA-crypt.txt and adds the new hash
algorithms sha256crypt and sha512crypt to crypt() and gen_salt()
respectively.

Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de>
Reviewed-by: Japin Li <japinli@hotmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c763235a2757e2f5f9e3e27268b9028349cef659.camel@oopsware.de
2025-04-05 19:17:13 +02:00
Andrew Dunstan
1495eff7bd Non text modes for pg_dumpall, correspondingly change pg_restore
pg_dumpall acquires a new -F/--format option, with the same meanings as
pg_dump. The default is p, meaning plain text. For any other value, a
directory is created containing two files, globals.data and map.dat. The
first contains SQL for restoring the global data, and the second
contains a map from oids to database names. It will also contain a
subdirectory called databases, inside which it will create archives in
the specified format, named using the database oids.

In these casess the -f argument is required.

If pg_restore encounters a directory containing globals.dat, and no
toc.dat, it restores the global settings and then restores each
database.

pg_restore acquires two new options: -g/--globals-only which suppresses
restoration of any databases, and --exclude-database which inhibits
restoration of particualr database(s) in the same way the same option
works in pg_dumpall.

Author: Mahendra Singh Thalor <mahi6run@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by:  Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Srinath Reddy <srinath2133@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cb103623-8ee6-4ba5-a2c9-f32e3a4933fa@dunslane.net
2025-04-04 16:01:22 -04:00
Masahiko Sawada
cf2655a902 pg_recvlogical: Add --failover option.
This new option instructs pg_recvlogical to create the logical
replication slot with the failover option enabled. It can be used in
conjunction with the --create-slot option.

Author: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck <mbanck@gmx.net>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSCPR01MB14966C54097FC83AF19F3516BF5AC2@OSCPR01MB14966.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2025-04-04 10:39:57 -07:00
Peter Geoghegan
92fe23d93a Add nbtree skip scan optimization.
Teach nbtree multi-column index scans to opportunistically skip over
irrelevant sections of the index given a query with no "=" conditions on
one or more prefix index columns.  When nbtree is passed input scan keys
derived from a predicate "WHERE b = 5", new nbtree preprocessing steps
output "WHERE a = ANY(<every possible 'a' value>) AND b = 5" scan keys.
That is, preprocessing generates a "skip array" (and an output scan key)
for the omitted prefix column "a", which makes it safe to mark the scan
key on "b" as required to continue the scan.  The scan is therefore able
to repeatedly reposition itself by applying both the "a" and "b" keys.

A skip array has "elements" that are generated procedurally and on
demand, but otherwise works just like a regular ScalarArrayOp array.
Preprocessing can freely add a skip array before or after any input
ScalarArrayOp arrays.  Index scans with a skip array decide when and
where to reposition the scan using the same approach as any other scan
with array keys.  This design builds on the design for array advancement
and primitive scan scheduling added to Postgres 17 by commit 5bf748b8.

Testing has shown that skip scans of an index with a low cardinality
skipped prefix column can be multiple orders of magnitude faster than an
equivalent full index scan (or sequential scan).  In general, the
cardinality of the scan's skipped column(s) limits the number of leaf
pages that can be skipped over.

The core B-Tree operator classes on most discrete types generate their
array elements with the help of their own custom skip support routine.
This infrastructure gives nbtree a way to generate the next required
array element by incrementing (or decrementing) the current array value.
It can reduce the number of index descents in cases where the next
possible indexable value frequently turns out to be the next value
stored in the index.  Opclasses that lack a skip support routine fall
back on having nbtree "increment" (or "decrement") a skip array's
current element by setting the NEXT (or PRIOR) scan key flag, without
directly changing the scan key's sk_argument.  These sentinel values
behave just like any other value from an array -- though they can never
locate equal index tuples (they can only locate the next group of index
tuples containing the next set of non-sentinel values that the scan's
arrays need to advance to).

A skip array's range is constrained by "contradictory" inequality keys.
For example, a skip array on "x" will only generate the values 1 and 2
given a qual such as "WHERE x BETWEEN 1 AND 2 AND y = 66".  Such a skip
array qual usually has near-identical performance characteristics to a
comparable SAOP qual "WHERE x = ANY('{1, 2}') AND y = 66".  However,
improved performance isn't guaranteed.  Much depends on physical index
characteristics.

B-Tree preprocessing is optimistic about skipping working out: it
applies static, generic rules when determining where to generate skip
arrays, which assumes that the runtime overhead of maintaining skip
arrays will pay for itself -- or lead to only a modest performance loss.
As things stand, these assumptions are much too optimistic: skip array
maintenance will lead to unacceptable regressions with unsympathetic
queries (queries whose scan can't skip over many irrelevant leaf pages).
An upcoming commit will address the problems in this area by enhancing
_bt_readpage's approach to saving cycles on scan key evaluation, making
it work in a way that directly considers the needs of = array keys
(particularly = skip array keys).

Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Masahiro Ikeda <masahiro.ikeda@nttdata.com>
Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas <heikki.linnakangas@iki.fi>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Reviewed-By: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-By: Alena Rybakina <a.rybakina@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzmn1YsLzOGgjAQZdn1STSG_y8qP__vggTaPAYXJP+G4bw@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-04 12:27:04 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
b4f453f6ab docs: Clarify that NULL arg to set_config() means reset to default
Author: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhang Mingli <zmlpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAKFQuwY0SK6JdCci1VJX6xsztRXgGeVEY-grkENZx%2B3CZpyPcQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-04 15:17:17 +03:00
Fujii Masao
534874fac0 Allow "COPY table TO" command to copy rows from materialized views.
Previously, "COPY table TO" command worked only with plain tables and
did not support materialized views, even when they were populated and
had physical storage. To copy rows from materialized views,
"COPY (query) TO" command had to be used, instead.

This commit extends "COPY table TO" to support populated materialized
views directly, improving usability and performance, as "COPY table TO"
is generally faster than "COPY (query) TO". Note that copying from
unpopulated materialized views will still result in an error.

Author: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kirill Reshke <reshkekirill@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxHVxnyRYy67hiPePNCPwVBMzhTQ6FaL9_Te5On9udG=yg@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-04 19:32:00 +09:00
Fujii Masao
0d6c477664 Extend ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES to define default privileges for large objects.
Previously, ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES did not support large objects.
This meant that to grant privileges to users other than the owner,
permissions had to be manually assigned each time a large object
was created, which was inconvenient.

This commit extends ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES to allow defining default
access privileges for large objects. With this change, specified privileges
will automatically apply to newly created large objects, making privilege
management more efficient.

As a side effect, this commit introduces the new keyword OBJECTS
since it's used in the syntax of ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES.

Original patch by Haruka Takatsuka, with some fixes and tests by Yugo Nagata,
and rebased by Laurenz Albe.

Author: Takatsuka Haruka <harukat@sraoss.co.jp>
Co-authored-by: Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>
Co-authored-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Masao Fujii <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240424115242.236b499b2bed5b7a27f7a418@sraoss.co.jp
2025-04-04 19:02:17 +09:00
Daniel Gustafsson
daa16893fa doc: Clarify the system value for sslrootcert
The documentation for the special value "system" for sslrootcert could
be misinterpreted to mean the default operating system CA store, which
it may be, but it's defined to be the default CA store of the SSL lib
used.

Backpatch down to v16 where support for the system value was added.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: George MacKerron <george@mackerron.co.uk>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B3CBBAA3-6EA3-4AB7-8619-4BBFAB93DDB4@yesql.se
Backpatch-through: 16
2025-04-04 09:47:36 +02:00
Masahiko Sawada
fd09c1316b Restrict copying of invalidated replication slots.
Previously, invalidated logical and physical replication slots could
be copied using the pg_copy_logical_replication_slot and
pg_copy_physical_replication_slot functions. Replication slots that
were invalidated for reasons other than WAL removal retained their
restart_lsn. This meant that a new slot copied from an invalidated
slot could have a restart_lsn pointing to a WAL segment that might
have already been removed.

This commit restricts the copying of invalidated replication slots.

Backpatch to v16, where slots could retain their restart_lsn when
invalidated for reasons other than WAL removal.

For v15 and earlier, this check is not required since slots can only
be invalidated due to WAL removal, and existing checks already handle
this issue.

Author: Shlok Kyal <shlok.kyal.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhijie Hou <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANhcyEU65aH0VYnLiu%3DOhNNxhnhNhwcXBeT-jvRe1OiJTo_Ayg%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 16
2025-04-03 10:30:00 -07:00
Daniel Gustafsson
2da74d8d64 libpq: Add support for dumping SSL key material to file
This adds a new connection parameter which instructs libpq to
write out keymaterial clientside into a file in order to make
connection debugging with Wireshark and similar tools possible.
The file format used is the standardized NSS format.

Author: Abhishek Chanda <abhishek.becs@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKiP-K85C8uQbzXKWf5wHQPkuygGUGcufke713iHmYWOe9q2dA@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-03 13:16:43 +02:00
Heikki Linnakangas
e4309f73f6 Add support for sorted gist index builds to btree_gist
This enables sortsupport in the btree_gist extension for faster builds
of gist indexes.

Sorted gist index build strategy is the new default now. Regression
tests are unchanged (except for one small change in the 'enum' test to
add coverage for enum values added later) and are using the sorted
build strategy instead.

One version of this was committed a long time ago already, in commit
9f984ba6d2, but it was quickly reverted because of buildfarm
failures. The failures were presumably caused by some small bugs, but
we never got around to debug and commit it again. This patch was
written from scratch, implementing the same idea, with some fragments
and ideas from the original patch.

Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de>
Author: Andrey Borodin <x4mmm@yandex-team.ru>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/64d324ce2a6d535d3f0f3baeeea7b25beff82ce4.camel@oopsware.de
2025-04-03 13:46:35 +03:00
Amit Kapila
d1d83827ba Doc: Improve -R option added in e5aeed4b80.
Author: Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PvJPnaL=70SbBe3fYg2nq74Z=Yv4X=zRpUWYfOi-q6=2w@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-03 14:27:13 +05:30
Amit Kapila
4868c96bc8 Fix slot synchronization for two_phase enabled slots.
The issue is that the transactions prepared before two-phase decoding is
enabled can fail to replicate to the subscriber after being committed on a
promoted standby following a failover. This is because the two_phase_at
field of a slot, which tracks the LSN from which two-phase decoding
starts, is not synchronized to standby servers. Without two_phase_at, the
logical decoding might incorrectly identify prepared transaction as
already replicated to the subscriber after promotion of standby server,
causing them to be skipped.

To address the issue on HEAD, the two_phase_at field of the slot is
exposed by the pg_replication_slots view and allows the slot
synchronization to copy this value to the corresponding synced slot on the
standby server.

This bug is likely to occur if the user toggles the two_phase option to
true after initial slot creation. Given that altering the two_phase option
of a replication slot is not allowed in PostgreSQL 17, this bug is less
likely to occur. We can't change the view/function definition in
backbranch so we can't push the same fix but we are brainstorming an
appropriate solution for PG17.

Author: Zhijie Hou <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB5724CC7C288535BBCEEE65DA94A72@TYAPR01MB5724.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2025-04-03 12:26:54 +05:30
Tom Lane
0dca5d68d7 Change SQL-language functions to use the plan cache.
In the historical implementation of SQL functions (if they don't get
inlined), we built plans for all the contained queries at first call
within an outer query, and then re-used those plans for the duration
of the outer query, and then forgot everything.  This was not ideal,
not least because the plans could not be customized to specific values
of the function's parameters.  Our plancache infrastructure seems
mature enough to be used here.  That will solve both the problem with
not being able to build custom plans and the problem with not being
able to share work across successive outer queries.

Aside from those performance concerns, this change fixes a
longstanding bugaboo with SQL functions: you could not write DDL that
would affect later statements in the same function.  That's mostly
still true with new-style SQL functions, since the results of parse
analysis are baked into the stored query trees (and protected by
dependency records).  But for old-style SQL functions, it will now
work much as it does with PL/pgSQL functions, because we delay parse
analysis and planning of each query until we're ready to run it.
Some edge cases that require replanning are now handled better too;
see for example the new rowsecurity test, where we now detect an RLS
context change that was previously missed.

One other edge-case change that might be worthy of a release note
is that we now insist that a SQL function's result be generated
by the physically-last query within it.  Previously, if the last
original query was deleted by a DO INSTEAD NOTHING rule, we'd be
willing to take the result from the preceding query instead.
This behavior was undocumented except in source-code comments,
and it seems hard to believe that anyone's relying on it.

Along the way to this feature, we needed a few infrastructure changes:

* The plancache can now take either a raw parse tree or an
analyzed-but-not-rewritten Query as the starting point for a
CachedPlanSource.  If given a Query, it is caller's responsibility
that nothing will happen to invalidate that form of the query.
We use this for new-style SQL functions, where what's in pg_proc is
serialized Query(s) and we trust the dependency mechanism to disallow
DDL that would break those.

* The plancache now offers a way to invoke a post-rewrite callback
to examine/modify the rewritten parse tree when it is rebuilding
the parse trees after a cache invalidation.  We need this because
SQL functions sometimes adjust the parse tree to make its output
exactly match the declared result type; if the plan gets rebuilt,
that has to be re-done.

* There is a new backend module utils/cache/funccache.c that
abstracts the idea of caching data about a specific function
usage (a particular function and set of input data types).
The code in it is moved almost verbatim from PL/pgSQL, which
has done that for a long time.  We use that logic now for
SQL-language functions too, and maybe other PLs will have use
for it in the future.

Author: Alexander Pyhalov <a.pyhalov@postgrespro.ru>
Co-authored-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8216639.NyiUUSuA9g@aivenlaptop
2025-04-02 14:06:02 -04:00
Heikki Linnakangas
ea3f9b6da3 docs: Fix column count attribute in table
Nothing seems to actually depend on the attribute, as the docs built
successfully, but let's be tidy.

Reported offlist by Matthias van de Meent
2025-04-02 18:21:07 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
b05751220b docs: Add a new section and a table listing protocol versions
Move the discussion on protocol versions and version negotiation to a
new "Protocol versions" section. Add a table listing all the different
protocol versions, starting from the obsolete protocol version 2, and
the PostgreSQL versions that support each.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/69f53970-1d55-4165-9151-6fb524e36af9@iki.fi
2025-04-02 16:41:51 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
a460251f0a Make cancel request keys longer
Currently, the cancel request key is a 32-bit token, which isn't very
much entropy. If you want to cancel another session's query, you can
brute-force it. In most environments, an unauthorized cancellation of
a query isn't very serious, but it nevertheless would be nice to have
more protection from it. Hence make the key longer, to make it harder
to guess.

The longer cancellation keys are generated when using the new protocol
version 3.2. For connections using version 3.0, short 4-bytes keys are
still used.

The new longer key length is not hardcoded in the protocol anymore,
the client is expected to deal with variable length keys, up to 256
bytes. This flexibility allows e.g. a connection pooler to add more
information to the cancel key, which might be useful for finding the
connection.

Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (earlier versions)
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/508d0505-8b7a-4864-a681-e7e5edfe32aa@iki.fi
2025-04-02 16:41:48 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
285613c60a libpq: Add min/max_protocol_version connection options
All supported version of the PostgreSQL server send the
NegotiateProtocolVersion message when an unsupported minor protocol
version is requested by a client. But many other applications that
implement the PostgreSQL protocol (connection poolers, or other
databases) do not, and the same is true for PostgreSQL server versions
older than 9.3. Connecting to such other applications thus fails if a
client requests a protocol version different than 3.0.

This patch adds a max_protocol_version connection option to libpq that
specifies the protocol version that libpq should request from the
server. Currently only 3.0 is supported, but that will change in a
future commit that bumps the protocol version. Even after that version
bump the default will likely stay 3.0 for the time being. Once more of
the ecosystem supports the NegotiateProtocolVersion message we might
want to change the default to the latest minor version.

This also adds the similar min_protocol_version connection option, to
allow the client to specify that connecting should fail if a lower
protocol version is attempted by the server. This can be used to
ensure that certain protocol features are used, which can be
particularly useful if those features impact security.

Author: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (earlier versions)
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAGECzQTfc_O%2BHXqAo5_-xG4r3EFVsTefUeQzSvhEyyLDba-O9w@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAGECzQRbAGqJnnJJxTdKewTsNOovUt4bsx3NFfofz3m2j-t7tA@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-02 16:41:45 +03:00
Heikki Linnakangas
85d799ba8a docs: Update phrase on message lengths in the protocol
The reasoning for why all the message formats are parseable without
the explicit message length field is anachronistic; the real reason is
that protocol version 2 did not have a message length field. There's
nothing wrong with relying on the message length, like we do in the
CopyData messags, even though it often still makes sense to have
length fields for individual parts in messages.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/02a4eed2-98f0-4796-9d4f-12128ff44fe0@iki.fi
2025-04-02 15:32:33 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
eec0040c4b Add support for NOT ENFORCED in foreign key constraints
This expands the NOT ENFORCED constraint flag, previously only
supported for CHECK constraints (commit ca87c415e2), to foreign key
constraints.

Normally, when a foreign key constraint is created on a table, action
and check triggers are added to maintain data integrity.  With this
patch, if a constraint is marked as NOT ENFORCED, integrity checks are
no longer required, making these triggers unnecessary.  Consequently,
when creating a NOT ENFORCED foreign key constraint, triggers will not
be created, and the constraint will be marked as NOT VALID.
Similarly, if an existing foreign key constraint is changed to NOT
ENFORCED, the associated triggers will be dropped, and the constraint
will also be marked as NOT VALID.  Conversely, if a NOT ENFORCED
foreign key constraint is changed to ENFORCED, the necessary triggers
will be created, and the will be changed to VALID by performing
necessary validation.

Since not-enforced foreign key constraints have no triggers, the
shortcut used for example in psql and pg_dump to skip looking for
foreign keys if the relation is known not to have triggers no longer
applies.  (It already didn't work for partitioned tables.)

Author: Amul Sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Joel Jacobson <joel@compiler.org>
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Isaac Morland <isaac.morland@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alexandra Wang <alexandra.wang.oss@gmail.com>
Tested-by: Triveni N <triveni.n@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAJ_b962c5AcYW9KUt_R_ER5qs3fUGbe4az-SP-vuwPS-w-AGA@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-02 13:36:44 +02:00
Fujii Masao
b53b88109f Improve error message when standby does accept connections.
Even after reaching the minimum recovery point, if there are long-lived
write transactions with 64 subtransactions on the primary, the recovery
snapshot may not yet be ready for hot standby, delaying read-only
connections on the standby. Previously, when read-only connections were
not accepted due to this condition, the following error message was logged:

    FATAL:  the database system is not yet accepting connections
    DETAIL:  Consistent recovery state has not been yet reached.

This DETAIL message was misleading because the following message was
already logged in this case:

    LOG:  consistent recovery state reached

This contradiction, i.e., indicating that the recovery state was consistent
while also stating it wasn’t, caused confusion.

This commit improves the error message to better reflect the actual state:

    FATAL: the database system is not yet accepting connections
    DETAIL: Recovery snapshot is not yet ready for hot standby.
    HINT: To enable hot standby, close write transactions with more than 64 subtransactions on the primary server.

To implement this, the commit introduces a new postmaster signal,
PMSIGNAL_RECOVERY_CONSISTENT. When the startup process reaches
a consistent recovery state, it sends this signal to the postmaster,
allowing it to correctly recognize that state.

Since this is not a clear bug, the change is applied only to the master
branch and is not back-patched.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi <torikoshia@oss.nttdata.com>
Co-authored-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/02db8cd8e1f527a8b999b94a4bee3165@oss.nttdata.com
2025-04-02 15:13:01 +09:00
David Rowley
121d774cae Doc: add information about partition locking
The documentation around locking of partitions for the executor startup
phase of run-time partition pruning wasn't clear about which partitions
were being locked.  Fix that.

Reviewed-by: Tender Wang <tndrwang@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvp738G75HfkKcfXaf3a8s%3D6mmtOLh46tMD0D2hAo1UCzA%40mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-04-02 14:02:44 +13:00
Tom Lane
6c12ae09f5 Introduce a SQL-callable function array_sort(anyarray).
Create a function that will sort the elements of an array
according to the element type's sort order.  If the array
has more than one dimension, the sub-arrays of the first
dimension are sorted per normal array-comparison rules,
leaving their contents alone.

In support of this, add pg_type.typarray to the set of fields
cached by the typcache.

Author: Junwang Zhao <zhjwpku@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEG8a3J41a4dpw_-F94fF-JPRXYxw-GfsgoGotKcjs9LVfEEvw@mail.gmail.com
2025-04-01 18:03:55 -04:00
Nathan Bossart
5aec7e07fb doc: Adjust some notes about pg_upgrade's file transfer modes.
--copy-file-range and --swap were not mentioned in a few places
that discuss the available file transfer modes.  This entire page
would likely benefit from an overhaul, but that's v19 material at
this point.

Oversights in commits d93627bcbe and 626d7236b6.
2025-04-01 14:37:47 -05:00
Andres Freund
60f566b4f2 aio: Add pg_aios view
The new view lists all IO handles that are currently in use and is mainly
useful for PG developers, but may also be useful when tuning PG.

Bumps catversion.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/uvrtrknj4kdytuboidbhwclo4gxhswwcpgadptsjvjqcluzmah%40brqs62irg4dt
2025-04-01 13:30:33 -04:00
Andres Freund
46250cdcb0 docs: Add acronym and glossary entries for I/O and AIO
These are fairly basic, but better than nothing.  While there are several
opportunities to link to these entries, this patch does not add any. They will
however be referenced by future patches.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20250326183102.92.nmisch@google.com
2025-04-01 13:30:33 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
0fcf02ad45 doc: Mention clock synchronization recommendation for hot_standby_feedback
hot_standby_feedback mechanics assume that clocks are synchronized,
but it was not clear from documentation.

Author: Jakub Wartak <jakub.wartak@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Euler Taveira <euler@eulerto.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmwBcALLrDgCyEhHP1enUxtPMjyNM_d1A2Lng3_6Rf4Qfw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-31 16:54:50 +02:00
Andres Freund
2a5e709e72 Enable IO concurrency on all systems
Previously effective_io_concurrency and maintenance_io_concurrency could not
be set above 0 on machines without fadvise support. AIO enables IO concurrency
without such support, via io_method=worker.

Currently only subsystems using the read stream API will take advantage of
this. Other users of maintenance_io_concurrency (like recovery prefetching)
which leverage OS advice directly will not benefit from this change. In those
cases, maintenance_io_concurrency will have no effect on I/O behavior.

Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_atGgZePo=_g6T3cNtfMf0QxpvoUh5OUqa_cnPdhLd=gw@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-30 19:16:47 -04:00
Andres Freund
b27f8637ea docs: Reframe track_io_timing related docs as wait time
With AIO it does not make sense anymore to track the time for each individual
IO, as multiple IOs can be in-flight at the same time. Instead we now track
the time spent *waiting* for IOs.

This should be reflected in the docs. While, so far, we only do a subset of
reads, and no other operations, via AIO, describing the GUC and view columns
as measuring IO waits is accurate for synchronous and asynchronous IO.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5dzyoduxlvfg55oqtjyjehez5uoq6hnwgzor4kkybkfdgkj7ag@rbi4gsmzaczk
2025-03-30 18:04:40 -04:00
Tomas Vondra
14ffaece0f amcheck: Add gin_index_check() to verify GIN index
Adds a new function, validating two kinds of invariants on a GIN index:

- parent-child consistency: Paths in a GIN graph have to contain
  consistent keys. Tuples on parent pages consistently include tuples
  from child pages; parent tuples do not require any adjustments.

- balanced-tree / graph: Each internal page has at least one downlink,
  and can reference either only leaf pages or only internal pages.

The GIN verification is based on work by Grigory Kryachko, reworked by
Heikki Linnakangas and with various improvements by Andrey Borodin.
Investigation and fixes for multiple bugs by Kirill Reshke.

Author: Grigory Kryachko <GSKryachko@gmail.com>
Author: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Author: Andrey Borodin <amborodin@acm.org>
Reviewed-By: José Villanova <jose.arthur@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-By: Nikolay Samokhvalov <samokhvalov@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-By: Kirill Reshke <reshkekirill@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/45AC9B0A-2B45-40EE-B08F-BDCF5739D1E1%40yandex-team.ru
2025-03-29 15:44:29 +01:00
Amit Kapila
fb2ea12f42 pg_createsubscriber: Add '--all' option.
The '--all' option indicates that the tool queries the source server
(publisher) for all databases and creates subscriptions on the target
server (subscriber) for databases with matching names. Without this user
needs to explicitly specify all databases by using -d option for each
database.

This simplifies converting a physical standby to a logical subscriber,
particularly during upgrades.

The options '--database', '--publication', '--subscription', and
'--replication-slot' cannot be used when '--all' is specified.

Author: Shubham Khanna <khannashubham1197@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Euler Taveira <euler@eulerto.com>
Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Shlok Kyal <shlok.kyal.oss@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHv8RjKhA=_h5vAbozzJ1Opnv=KXYQHQ-fJyaMfqfRqPpnC2bA@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-28 12:26:39 +05:30
Álvaro Herrera
9fbd53dea5
Remove the query_id_squash_values GUC
Commit 62d712ecfd introduced the capability to calculate the same
queryId for queries with different lengths of constants in a list for an
IN clause.  This behavior was originally enabled with a GUC
query_id_squash_values.  After a discussion about the value of such a
GUC, it was decided to back out of the use of a GUC and make the
squashing behavior the only available option.

Author: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z-LZyygkkNyA8-kR@msg.df7cb.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcVTK-3C-8NWV1oY2NZrvtnMCDqnyYYyk1T7WMUG65MeOQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-27 13:33:37 +01:00
Álvaro Herrera
4a02af8b1a
Simplify syntax for ALTER TABLE ALTER CONSTRAINT NO INHERIT
Commit d45597f72f introduced the ability to change a not-null
constraint from NO INHERIT to INHERIT and vice versa, but we included
the SET noise word in the syntax for it.  The SET turns out not to be
necessary and goes against what the SQL standard says for other ALTER
TABLE subcommands, so remove it.

This changes the way this command is processed for constraint types
other than not-null, so there are some error message changes.

Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Suraj Kharage <suraj.kharage@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202503251602.vsxaehsyaoac@alvherre.pgsql
2025-03-27 09:24:52 +01:00
Michael Paquier
44fe6ceb51 doc: Correct description of values used in FSM for indexes
The implementation of FSM for indexes is simpler than heap, where 0 is
used to track if a page is in-use and (BLCKSZ - 1) if a page is free.
One comment in indexfsm.c and one description in the documentation of
pg_freespacemap were incorrect about that.

Author: Alex Friedman <alexf01@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/71eef655-c192-453f-ac45-2772fec2cb04@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-03-27 10:20:41 +09:00
Andres Freund
c325a7633f aio: Add io_method=io_uring
Performing AIO using io_uring can be considerably faster than
io_method=worker, particularly when lots of small IOs are issued, as
a) the context-switch overhead for worker based AIO becomes more significant
b) the number of IO workers can become limiting

io_uring, however, is linux specific and requires an additional compile-time
dependency (liburing).

This implementation is fairly simple and there are substantial optimization
opportunities.

The description of the existing AIO_IO_COMPLETION wait event is updated to
make the difference between it and the new AIO_IO_URING_EXECUTION clearer.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Reviewed-by: Jakub Wartak <jakub.wartak@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/uvrtrknj4kdytuboidbhwclo4gxhswwcpgadptsjvjqcluzmah%40brqs62irg4dt
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210223100344.llw5an2aklengrmn@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/stj36ea6yyhoxtqkhpieia2z4krnam7qyetc57rfezgk4zgapf@gcnactj4z56m
2025-03-26 19:49:13 -04:00
Andres Freund
8eadd5c73c aio: Add liburing dependency
Will be used in a subsequent commit, to implement io_method=io_uring. Kept
separate for easier review.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/uvrtrknj4kdytuboidbhwclo4gxhswwcpgadptsjvjqcluzmah%40brqs62irg4dt
2025-03-26 19:45:32 -04:00
Michael Paquier
f056f75daf doc: Mention possible ephemeral discrepancies in pg_stat_activity
Ephemeral inconsistencies across multiple attributes of pg_stat_activity
can exist as the system is designed to be efficient with a low overhead.
This question is raised by users from time to time based on the data
read in the view, so let's add a note in the docs about this
possibility.

Author: Alex Friedman <alexf01@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8a275154-a654-44b0-ab37-197802f04c7b@gmail.com
2025-03-27 08:07:54 +09:00
Robert Haas
de65c4dade Fix oversights in commit 8d5ceb113e
It added bogus whitespace at the end of a line in the documentation.
It should not have done that.

The pg_overexplain tests must SET debug_parallel_query = false,
not just RESET debug_parallel_query, or we get failures on test
machines that make debug_parallel_query = true the defualt.
2025-03-26 14:22:45 -04:00
Robert Haas
8d5ceb113e pg_overexplain: Additional EXPLAIN options for debugging.
There's a fair amount of information in the Plan and PlanState trees
that isn't printed by any existing EXPLAIN option. This means that,
when working on the planner, it's often necessary to rely on facilities
such as debug_print_plan, which produce excessively voluminous
output. Hence, use the new EXPLAIN extension facilities to implement
EXPLAIN (DEBUG) and EXPLAIN (RANGE_TABLE) as extensions to the core
EXPLAIN facility.

A great deal more could be done here, and the specific choices about
what to print and how are definitely arguable, but this is at least
a starting point for discussion and a jumping-off point for possible
future improvements.

Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviweed-by: Andrei Lepikhov <lepihov@gmail.com> (who didn't like it)
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZfvQUBWQ2P8iO30jywhfEAKyNzMZSR+uc2xr9PZBw6eQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-26 13:52:21 -04:00
Tom Lane
9324c8c580 Introduce PG_MODULE_MAGIC_EXT macro.
This macro allows dynamically loaded shared libraries (modules) to
provide a wired-in module name and version, and possibly other
compile-time-constant fields in future.  This information can be
retrieved with the new pg_get_loaded_modules() function.

This feature is expected to be particularly useful for modules
that do not have any exposed SQL functionality and thus are
not associated with a SQL-level extension object.  But even for
modules that do belong to extensions, being able to verify the
actual code version can be useful.

Author: Andrei Lepikhov <lepihov@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Yurii Rashkovskii <yrashk@omnigres.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dd4d1b59-d0fe-49d5-b28f-1e463b68fa32@gmail.com
2025-03-26 11:06:12 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
3642df265d dblink: SCRAM authentication pass-through
This enables SCRAM authentication for dblink (using dblink_fdw) when
connecting to a foreign server without having to store a plain-text
password on user mapping options

This uses the same approach as it was implemented for postgres_fdw in
commit 761c79508e.  (It also contains the equivalent of the
subsequent fixes 76563f88cf and d2028e9bbc1.)

Author: Matheus Alcantara <mths.dev@pm.me>
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAFY6G8ercA1KES%3DE_0__R9QCTR805TTyYr1No8qF8ZxmMg8z2Q%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-26 10:49:23 +01:00
Dean Rasheed
a3b6dfd410 Add support for gamma() and lgamma() functions.
These are useful general-purpose math functions which are included in
POSIX and C99, and are commonly included in other math libraries, so
expose them as SQL-callable functions.

Author: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Stepan Neretin <sncfmgg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Dmitry Koval <d.koval@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Alexandra Wang <alexandra.wang.oss@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCXpGyfjXCirFk9au+FvM0y2Ah+2-0WSJx7MO368ysNUPA@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-26 09:35:53 +00:00
Michael Paquier
787514b30b Use relation name instead of OID in query jumbling for RangeTblEntry
custom_query_jumble (introduced in 5ac462e2b7 as a node field
attribute) is now assigned to the expanded reference name "eref" of
RangeTblEntry, adding in the query jumble computation the non-qualified
aliased relation name, without the list of column names.  The relation
OID is removed from the query jumbling.

The effects of this change can be seen in the tests added by
3430215fe3, where pg_stat_statements (PGSS) entries are now grouped
using the relation name, ignoring the relation search_path may point at.
For example, these two relations are different, but are now grouped in a
single PGSS entry as they are assigned the same query ID:
CREATE TABLE foo1.tab (a int);
CREATE TABLE foo2.tab (b int);
SET search_path = 'foo1';
SELECT count(*) FROM tab;
SET search_path = 'foo2';
SELECT count(*) FROM tab;
SELECT count(*) FROM foo1.tab;
SELECT count(*) FROM foo2.tab;
SELECT query, calls FROM pg_stat_statements WHERE query ~ 'FROM tab';
          query           | calls
--------------------------+-------
 SELECT count(*) FROM tab |     4
(1 row)

It is still possible to use an alias in the FROM clause to split these.
This behavior is useful for relations re-created with the same name,
where queries based on such relations would be grouped in the same
PGSS entry.  For permanent schemas, it should not really matter in
practice.  The main benefit is for workloads that use a lot of temporary
relations, which are usually re-created with the same name continuously.
These can be a heavy source of bloat in PGSS depending on the workload.
Such entries can now be grouped together, improving the user experience.

The original idea from Christoph Berg used catalog lookups to find
temporary relations, something that the query jumble has never done, and
it could cause some performance regressions.  The idea to use
RangeTblEntry.eref and the relation name, applying the same rules for
all relations, temporary and not temporary, has been proposed by Tom
Lane.  The documentation additions have been suggested by Sami Imseih.

Author: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Co-authored-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Christoph Berg <myon@debian.org>
Reviewed-by: Lukas Fittl <lukas@fittl.com>
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z9iWXKGwkm8RAC93@msg.df7cb.de
2025-03-26 15:21:05 +09:00
Jeff Davis
bde2fb797a Add pg_dump --with-{schema|data|statistics} options.
By adding the positive variants of options, in addition to the
negative variants that already exist, users can be explicit about what
pg_dump should produce.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bd0513e4b1ea2b2f2d06f02720c6579711cb62a6.camel@j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
2025-03-25 17:36:38 -07:00
Nathan Bossart
626d7236b6 pg_upgrade: Add --swap for faster file transfer.
This new option instructs pg_upgrade to move the data directories
from the old cluster to the new cluster and then to replace the
catalog files with those generated for the new cluster.  This mode
can outperform --link, --clone, --copy, and --copy-file-range,
especially on clusters with many relations.

However, this mode creates many garbage files in the old cluster,
which can prolong the file synchronization step if
--sync-method=syncfs is used.  To handle that, we recommend using
--sync-method=fsync with this mode, and pg_upgrade internally uses
"initdb --sync-only --no-sync-data-files" for file synchronization.
pg_upgrade will synchronize the catalog files as they are
transferred.  We assume that the database files transferred from
the old cluster were synchronized prior to upgrade.

This mode also complicates reverting to the old cluster, so we
recommend restoring from backup upon failure during or after file
transfer.  We did consider teaching pg_upgrade how to generate a
revert script for such failures, but we decided against it due to
the rarity of failing during file transfer, the complexity of
generating the script, and the potential for misusing the script.

The new mode is limited to clusters located in the same file
system.  With some effort, we could probably support upgrades
between different file systems, but this mode is unlikely to offer
much benefit if we have to copy the files across file system
boundaries.

It is also limited to upgrades from version 10 or newer.  There are
a few known obstacles for using swap mode to upgrade from older
versions.  For example, the visibility map format changed in v9.6,
and the sequence tuple format changed in v10.  In fact, swap mode
omits the --sequence-data option in its uses of pg_dump and instead
reuses the old cluster's sequence data files.  While teaching swap
mode to deal with these kinds of changes is surely possible (and we
may have to deal with similar problems in the future, anyway), it
doesn't seem worth the effort to support upgrades from
long-unsupported versions.

Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane <htamfids@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zyvop-LxLXBLrZil%40nathan
2025-03-25 16:02:35 -05:00
Nathan Bossart
9c49f0e8cd pg_dump: Add --sequence-data.
This new option instructs pg_dump to dump sequence data when the
--no-data, --schema-only, or --statistics-only option is specified.
This was originally considered for commit a7e5457db8, but it was
left out at that time because there was no known use-case.  A
follow-up commit will use this to optimize pg_upgrade's file
transfer step.

Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zyvop-LxLXBLrZil%40nathan
2025-03-25 16:02:35 -05:00
Nathan Bossart
cf131fa942 initdb: Add --no-sync-data-files.
This new option instructs initdb to skip synchronizing any files
in database directories, the database directories themselves, and
the tablespace directories, i.e., everything in the base/
subdirectory and any other tablespace directories.  Other files,
such as those in pg_wal/ and pg_xact/, will still be synchronized
unless --no-sync is also specified.  --no-sync-data-files is
primarily intended for internal use by tools that separately ensure
the skipped files are synchronized to disk.  A follow-up commit
will use this to help optimize pg_upgrade's file transfer step.

The --sync-method=fsync implementation of this option makes use of
a new exclude_dir parameter for walkdir().  When not NULL,
exclude_dir specifies a directory to skip processing.  The
--sync-method=syncfs implementation of this option just skips
synchronizing the non-default tablespace directories.  This means
that initdb will still synchronize some or all of the database
files, but there's not much we can do about that.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zyvop-LxLXBLrZil%40nathan
2025-03-25 16:02:35 -05:00
Jeff Davis
650ab8aaf1 Stats: use schemaname/relname instead of regclass.
For import and export, use schemaname/relname rather than
regclass.

This is more natural during export, fits with the other arguments
better, and it gives better control over error handling in case we
need to downgrade more errors to warnings.

Also, use text for the argument types for schemaname, relname, and
attname so that casts to "name" are not required.

Author: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=ceOSsx_=oe73QQ-BxUFR2Cwqum7-UP_fPe22DBY0NerA@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-25 11:16:06 -07:00
Jeff Davis
2a420f7995 Minor doc update for commit 99f8f3fbbc.
Author: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
2025-03-25 11:15:52 -07:00
Daniel Gustafsson
1a759c8327 psql: Make default \watch interval configurable
The default interval for \watch to wait between executing queries,
when executed without a specified interval, was hardcoded to two
seconds.  This adds the new variable WATCH_INTERVAL which is used
to set the default interval, making it configurable for the user.
This makes \watch the first command which has a user configurable
default setting.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Kirill Reshke <reshkekirill@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiro Ikeda <ikedamsh@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane <htamfids@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B2FD26B4-8F64-4552-A603-5CC3DF1C7103@yesql.se
2025-03-25 17:53:33 +01:00
Thomas Munro
3c86223c99 libpq: Deprecate pg_int64.
Previously we used pg_int64 in three function prototypes in libpq.  It
was added by commit 461ef73f to expose the platform-dependent type used
for int64 in the C89 era.  As of commit 962da900 it is defined as
standard int64_t, and the dust seems to have settled.

Let's just use int64_t directly in these three client-facing functions
instead of (yet) another name.  We've required C99 and thus <stdint.h>
since PostgreSQL 12, C89 and C++98 compilers are long gone, and client
applications very likely use standard types for their own 64-bit needs.
This also cleans up the obscure placement of a new #include <stdint.h>
directive in postgres_ext.h, required for the new definition.  The
typedef was hiding in there for historical reasons, but it doesn't fit
postgres_ext.h's own description of its purpose and there is no evidence
of client applications including postgres_ext.h directly to see it.

Keep a typedef marked deprecated for backward compatibility, but move it
into libpq-fe.h where it was used.

Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGKn_EkNNGMY5RzMcKP%2Ba6urT4JF%3DCPhw_zHtQwjvX6P2g%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-25 21:40:00 +13:00
Andres Freund
adb5f85fa5 Redefine max_files_per_process to control additionally opened files
Until now max_files_per_process=N limited each backend to open N files in
total (minus a safety factor), even if there were already more files opened in
postmaster and inherited by backends.  Change max_files_per_process to control
how many additional files each process is allowed to open.

The main motivation for this is the patch to add io_method=io_uring, which
needs to open one file for each backend.  Without this patch, even if
RLIMIT_NOFILE is high enough, postmaster will fail in set_max_safe_fds() if
started with a high max_connections.  The cause of the failure is that, until
now, set_max_safe_fds() subtracted the already open files from
max_files_per_process.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/w6uiicyou7hzq47mbyejubtcyb2rngkkf45fk4q7inue5kfbeo@bbfad3qyubvs
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGECzQQh6VSy3KG4pN1d=h9J=D1rStFCMR+t7yh_Kwj-g87aLQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-24 18:20:18 -04:00
Fujii Masao
dfc13428a9 doc: Clarify required options for each action in pg_recvlogical.
Each pg_recvlogical action requires specific options. For example,
--slot, --dbname, and --file must be specified with the --start action.
Previously, the documentation did not clearly outline these requirements.

This commit updates the documentation to explicitly state
the necessary options for each action.

Author: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Co-authored-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSCPR01MB14966930B4357BAE8C9D68A8AF5C72@OSCPR01MB14966.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2025-03-25 00:14:38 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
76563f88cf postgres_fdw: improve security checks
SCRAM pass-through should not bypass the FDW security check as it was
implemented for postgres_fdw in commit 761c79508e.

This commit improves the security check by adding new SCRAM
pass-through checks to ensure that the required SCRAM connection
options are not overwritten by the user mapping or foreign server
options.  This is meant to match the security requirements for a
password-using connection.

Since libpq has no SCRAM-specific equivalent of
PQconnectionUsedPassword(), we enforce this instead by making the
use_scram_passthrough option of postgres_fdw imply
require_auth=scram-sha-256.  This means that if use_scram_passthrough
is set, some situations that might otherwise have worked are
preempted, for example GSSAPI with delegated credentials.  This could
be enhanced in the future if there is desire for more flexibility.

Reported-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Author: Matheus Alcantara <mths.dev@pm.me>
Co-authored-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAFY6G8ercA1KES%3DE_0__R9QCTR805TTyYr1No8qF8ZxmMg8z2Q%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-24 15:56:53 +01:00
Amit Kapila
73eba5004a Detect and Log multiple_unique_conflicts type conflict.
Introduce a new conflict type, multiple_unique_conflicts, to handle cases
where an incoming row during logical replication violates multiple UNIQUE
constraints.

Previously, the apply worker detected and reported only the first
encountered key conflict (insert_exists/update_exists), causing repeated
failures as each constraint violation needs to be handled one by one
making the process slow and error-prone.

With this patch, the apply worker checks all unique constraints upfront
once the first key conflict is detected and reports
multiple_unique_conflicts if multiple violations exist. This allows users
to resolve all conflicts at once by deleting all conflicting tuples rather
than dealing with them individually or skipping the transaction.

In the future, this will also allow us to specify different resolution
handlers for such a conflict type.

Add the stats for this conflict type in pg_stat_subscription_stats.

Author: Nisha Moond <nisha.moond412@gmail.com>
Author: Zhijie Hou <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar <dilipbalaut@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABdArM7FW-_dnthGkg2s0fy1HhUB8C3ELA0gZX1kkbs1ZZoV3Q@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-24 12:30:44 +05:30
Masahiko Sawada
04ff636cbc Add GUC option to control maximum active replication origins.
This commit introduces a new GUC option max_active_replication_origins
to control the maximum number of active replication
origins. Previously, this was controlled by
'max_replication_slots'. Having a separate GUC option provides better
flexibility for setting up subscribers, as they may not require
replication slots (for cascading replication) but always require
replication origins.

Author: Euler Taveira <euler@eulerto.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b81db436-8262-4575-b7c4-bc0c1551000b@app.fastmail.com
2025-03-21 12:20:15 -07:00
Fujii Masao
14413d0ef5 doc: Remove incorrect description about dropping replication slots.
pg_drop_replication_slot() can drop replication slots created on
a different database than the one where it is executed. This behavior
has been in place since PostgreSQL 9.4, when pg_drop_replication_slot()
was introduced.

However, commit ff539d mistakenly added the following incorrect
description in the documentation:

     For logical slots, this must be called when connected to
     the same database the slot was created on.

This commit removes that incorrect statement. A similar mistake was
also present in the documentation for the DROP_REPLICATION_SLOT
command, which has now been corrected as well.

Back-patch to all supported versions.

Author: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSCPR01MB14966C6BE304B5BB2E58D4009F5DE2@OSCPR01MB14966.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-03-21 12:56:39 +09:00
Nathan Bossart
0164a0f9ee Add vacuum_truncate configuration parameter.
This new parameter works just like the storage parameter of the
same name: if set to true (which is the default), autovacuum and
VACUUM attempt to truncate any empty pages at the end of the table.
It is primarily intended to help users avoid locking issues on hot
standbys.  The setting can be overridden with the storage parameter
or VACUUM's TRUNCATE option.

Since there's presently no way to determine whether a Boolean
storage parameter is explicitly set or has just picked up the
default value, this commit also introduces an isset_offset member
to relopt_parse_elt.

Suggested-by: Will Storey <will@summercat.com>
Author: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Gurjeet Singh <gurjeet@singh.im>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z2DE4lDX4tHqNGZt%40dev.null
2025-03-20 10:16:50 -05:00
Amit Kapila
e5aeed4b80 pg_createsubscriber: Add -R publications option.
This patch introduces a new '-R'/'--remove' option in the
'pg_createsubscriber' utility to specify the object types to be removed
from the subscriber. Currently, we add support to specify 'publications'
as an object type. In the future, other object types like failover-slots
could be added.

This feature allows optionally to remove publications on the subscriber
that were replicated from the primary server (before running this tool)
during physical replication. Users may want to retain these publications
in case they want some pre-existing subscribers to point to the newly
created subscriber.

Author: Shubham Khanna <khannashubham1197@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Euler Taveira <euler@eulerto.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhijie Hou <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Nisha Moond <nisha.moond412@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHv8RjL4OvoYafofTb_U_JD5HuyoNowBoGpMfnEbhDSENA74Kg@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-20 12:21:54 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
4f7f7b0375 extension_control_path
The new GUC extension_control_path specifies a path to look for
extension control files.  The default value is $system, which looks in
the compiled-in location, as before.

The path search uses the same code and works in the same way as
dynamic_library_path.

Some use cases of this are: (1) testing extensions during package
builds, (2) installing extensions outside security-restricted
containers like Python.app (on macOS), (3) adding extensions to
PostgreSQL running in a Kubernetes environment using operators such as
CloudNativePG without having to rebuild the base image for each new
extension.

There is also a tweak in Makefile.global so that it is possible to
install extensions using PGXS into an different directory than the
default, using 'make install prefix=/else/where'.  This previously
only worked when specifying the subdirectories, like 'make install
datadir=/else/where/share pkglibdir=/else/where/lib', for purely
implementation reasons.  (Of course, without the path feature,
installing elsewhere was rarely useful.)

Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Co-authored-by: Matheus Alcantara <matheusssilv97@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David E. Wheeler <david@justatheory.com>
Reviewed-by: Gabriele Bartolini <gabriele.bartolini@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Marco Nenciarini <marco.nenciarini@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Niccolò Fei <niccolo.fei@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E7C7BFFB-8857-48D4-A71F-88B359FADCFD@justatheory.com
2025-03-19 07:03:20 +01:00
Michael Paquier
2cce0fe440 psql: Allow queries terminated by semicolons while in pipeline mode
Currently, the only way to pipe queries in an ongoing pipeline (in a
\startpipeline block) is to leverage the meta-commands able to create
extended queries such as \bind, \parse or \bind_named.

While this is good enough for testing the backend with pipelines, it has
been mentioned that it can also be very useful to allow queries
terminated by semicolons to be appended to a pipeline.  For example, it
would be possible to migrate existing psql scripts to use pipelines by
just adding a set of \startpipeline and \endpipeline meta-commands,
making such scripts more efficient.

Doing such a change is proving to be simple in psql: queries terminated
by semicolons can be executed through PQsendQueryParams() without any
parameters set when the pipeline mode is active, instead of
PQsendQuery(), the default, like pgbench.  \watch is still forbidden
while in a pipeline, as it expects its results to be processed
synchronously.

The large portion of this commit consists in providing more test
coverage, with mixes of extended queries appended in a pipeline by \bind
and friends, and queries terminated by semicolons.

This improvement has been suggested by Daniel Vérité.

Author: Anthonin Bonnefoy <anthonin.bonnefoy@datadoghq.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d67b9c19-d009-4a50-8020-1a0ea92366a1@manitou-mail.org
2025-03-19 13:34:59 +09:00
Thomas Munro
873c0fd678 oauth: Improve validator docs on interruptibility
Andres pointed out that EINTR handling is inadequate for real-world use
cases. Direct module writers to our wait APIs instead.

Author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/p4bd7mn6dxr2zdak74abocyltpfdxif4pxqzixqpxpetjwt34h%40qc6jgfmoddvq
2025-03-19 16:58:06 +13:00
Thomas Munro
06fb5612c9 Increase io_combine_limit range to 1MB.
The default of 128kB is unchanged, but the upper limit is changed from
32 blocks to 128 blocks, unless the operating system's IOV_MAX is too
low.  Some other RDBMSes seem to cap their multi-block buffer pool I/O
around this number, and it seems useful to allow experimentation.

The concrete change is to our definition of PG_IOV_MAX, which provides
the maximum for io_combine_limit and io_max_combine_limit.  It also
affects a couple of other places that work with arrays of struct iovec
or smaller objects on the stack, so we still don't want to use the
system IOV_MAX directly without a clamp: it is not under our control and
likely to be 1024.  128 seems acceptable for our current usage.

For Windows, we can't use real scatter/gather yet, so we continue to
define our own IOV_MAX value of 16 and emulate preadv()/pwritev() with
loops.  Someone would need to research the trade-offs of raising that
number.

NB if trying to see this working: you might temporarily need to hack
BAS_BULKREAD to be bigger, since otherwise the obvious way of "a very
big SELECT" is limited by that for now.

Suggested-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2B2T9p-%2BzM6Eeou-RAJjTML6eit1qn26f9twznX59qtCA%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-19 15:40:35 +13:00
Thomas Munro
10f6646847 Introduce io_max_combine_limit.
The existing io_combine_limit can be changed by users.  The new
io_max_combine_limit is fixed at server startup time, and functions as a
silent clamp on the user setting.  That in itself is probably quite
useful, but the primary motivation is:

aio_init.c allocates shared memory for all asynchronous IOs including
some per-block data, and we didn't want to waste memory you'd never used
by assuming they could be up to PG_IOV_MAX.  This commit already halves
the size of 'AioHandleIov' and 'AioHandleData'.  A follow-up commit can
now expand PG_IOV_MAX without affecting that.

Since our GUC system doesn't support dependencies or cross-checks
between GUCs, the user-settable one now assigns a "raw" value to
io_combine_limit_guc, and the lower of io_combine_limit_guc and
io_max_combine_limit is maintained in io_combine_limit.

Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (earlier version)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKG%2B2T9p-%2BzM6Eeou-RAJjTML6eit1qn26f9twznX59qtCA%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-19 15:23:54 +13:00
Nathan Bossart
c9d502eb68 Update guidance for running vacuumdb after pg_upgrade.
Now that pg_upgrade can carry over most optimizer statistics, we
should recommend using vacuumdb's new --missing-stats-only option
to only analyze relations that are missing statistics.

Reviewed-by: John Naylor <johncnaylorls@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z5O1bpcwDrMgyrYy%40nathan
2025-03-18 16:32:56 -05:00
Nathan Bossart
edba754f05 vacuumdb: Add option for analyzing only relations missing stats.
This commit adds a new --missing-stats-only option that can be used
with --analyze-only or --analyze-in-stages.  When this option is
specified, vacuumdb will analyze a relation if it lacks any
statistics for a column, expression index, or extended statistics
object.  This new option is primarily intended for use after
pg_upgrade (since it can now retain most optimizer statistics), but
it might be useful in other situations, too.

Author: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: John Naylor <johncnaylorls@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z5O1bpcwDrMgyrYy%40nathan
2025-03-18 16:32:56 -05:00
Tom Lane
a6524105d2 Doc: manually break lines in wide UUID examples.
Buildfarm member crake has been complaining "WARNING: The contents of
fo:inline line 1 exceed the available area in the inline-progression
direction by 20500 millipoints. (See position 23808:106)" since
ba57dcfdc went in.  The other doc-building animals are not showing
this warning, and I don't see it on my RHEL8 workstation either, but
I was able to reproduce it on a Fedora 41 box.  So apparently this
is due to a recent-ish change in DocBook's line-breaking heuristics,
which caused it to cope less well with the UUIDs in these examples.
Put in some zero-width spaces to encourage the PDF toolchain to
break these lines in a better place.  (Only one of these examples
actually needs this today, but I marked up all three to ensure that
they get wrapped in a consistent way.)
2025-03-18 15:35:13 -04:00
Álvaro Herrera
62d712ecfd
Introduce squashing of constant lists in query jumbling
pg_stat_statements produces multiple entries for queries like
    SELECT something FROM table WHERE col IN (1, 2, 3, ...)

depending on the number of parameters, because every element of
ArrayExpr is individually jumbled.  Most of the time that's undesirable,
especially if the list becomes too large.

Fix this by introducing a new GUC query_id_squash_values which modifies
the node jumbling code to only consider the first and last element of a
list of constants, rather than each list element individually.  This
affects both the query_id generated by query jumbling, as well as
pg_stat_statements query normalization so that it suppresses printing of
the individual elements of such a list.

The default value is off, meaning the previous behavior is maintained.

Author: Dmitry Dolgov <9erthalion6@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Sergey Dudoladov (mysterious, off-list)
Reviewed-by: David Geier <geidav.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Sutou Kouhei <kou@clear-code.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Marcos Pegoraro <marcos@f10.com.br>
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com>
Tested-by: Yasuo Honda <yasuo.honda@gmail.com>
Tested-by: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Tested-by: Maciek Sakrejda <m.sakrejda@gmail.com>
Tested-by: Chengxi Sun <sunchengxi@highgo.com>
Tested-by: Jakub Wartak <jakub.wartak@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+q6zcWtUbT_Sxj0V6HY6EZ89uv5wuG5aefpe_9n0Jr3VwntFg@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-18 18:56:11 +01:00
Andres Freund
247ce06b88 aio: Add io_method=worker
The previous commit introduced the infrastructure to start io_workers. This
commit actually makes the workers execute IOs.

IO workers consume IOs from a shared memory submission queue, run traditional
synchronous system calls, and perform the shared completion handling
immediately.  Client code submits most requests by pushing IOs into the
submission queue, and waits (if necessary) using condition variables.  Some
IOs cannot be performed in another process due to lack of infrastructure for
reopening the file, and must processed synchronously by the client code when
submitted.

For now the default io_method is changed to "worker". We should re-evaluate
that around beta1, we might want to be careful and set the default to "sync"
for 18.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Co-authored-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/uvrtrknj4kdytuboidbhwclo4gxhswwcpgadptsjvjqcluzmah%40brqs62irg4dt
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210223100344.llw5an2aklengrmn@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/stj36ea6yyhoxtqkhpieia2z4krnam7qyetc57rfezgk4zgapf@gcnactj4z56m
2025-03-18 11:54:01 -04:00
Andres Freund
55b454d0e1 aio: Infrastructure for io_method=worker
This commit contains the basic, system-wide, infrastructure for
io_method=worker. It does not yet actually execute IO, this commit just
provides the infrastructure for running IO workers, kept separate for easier
review.

The number of IO workers can be adjusted with a PGC_SIGHUP GUC. Eventually
we'd like to make the number of workers dynamically scale up/down based on the
current "IO load".

To allow the number of IO workers to be increased without a restart, we need
to reserve PGPROC entries for the workers unconditionally. This has been
judged to be worth the cost. If it turns out to be problematic, we can
introduce a PGC_POSTMASTER GUC to control the maximum number.

As io workers might be needed during shutdown, e.g. for AIO during the
shutdown checkpoint, a new PMState phase is added. IO workers are shut down
after the shutdown checkpoint has been performed and walsender/archiver have
shut down, but before the checkpointer itself shuts down. See also
87a6690cc6.

Updates PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID due to the addition of a new BackendType.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Co-authored-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/uvrtrknj4kdytuboidbhwclo4gxhswwcpgadptsjvjqcluzmah%40brqs62irg4dt
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20210223100344.llw5an2aklengrmn@alap3.anarazel.de
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/stj36ea6yyhoxtqkhpieia2z4krnam7qyetc57rfezgk4zgapf@gcnactj4z56m
2025-03-18 11:54:01 -04:00
Daniel Gustafsson
daa02c6bd9 Add X25519 to the default set of curves
Since many clients default to the X25519 curve in the TLS handshake,
the fact that the server by defualt doesn't support it cause an extra
roundtrip for each TLS connection.  By adding multiple curves, which
is supported since 3d1ef3a15c, we can reduce the risk of extra
roundtrips.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Co-authored-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240616234612.6cslu7nqexquvwj7@awork3.anarazel.de
2025-03-18 15:26:27 +01:00
Melanie Plageman
cc6be07ebd Increase default maintenance_io_concurrency to 16
Since its introduction in fc34b0d9de, the default
maintenance_io_concurrency has been larger than the default
effective_io_concurrency. maintenance_io_concurrency primarily
controlled prefetching done on behalf of the whole system, for
operations like recovery. Therefore it makes sense for it to have a
value equal to or greater than effective_io_concurrency, which controls
I/O concurrency for reading a relation in a bitmap heap scan.

ff79b5b2ab increased effective_io_concurrency to 16, so we'll increase
maintenance_io_concurrency as well. For now, though, we'll keep the
defaults of effective_io_concurrency and maintenance_io_concurrency
equal to one another (16).

On fast, high IOPs systems, significantly higher values of
maintenance_io_concurrency are observably beneficial [1]. However, such
values would flood low IOPs systems and increase overall system I/O
latency.

It is worth mentioning that since 9256822608 and c3e775e608,
maintenance_io_concurrency also controls the I/O concurrency of each
vacuum worker. Since many autovacuum workers may be simultaneously
issuing I/Os, we want to keep maintenance_io_concurrency appropriately
conservative.

[1] https://postgr.es/m/c5d52837-6256-0556-ac8c-d6d3d558820a%40enterprisedb.com

Suggested-by: Jakub Wartak <jakub.wartak@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmxdHQaU%2B2Zpe6d%3Dx%3D0vigJ1sfWwwVYLJAf%3Dud_wQ_VcUw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-18 09:08:10 -04:00
Michael Paquier
17caf66445 psql: Add \sendpipeline to send query buffers while in a pipeline
In the initial pipeline support for psql added in 41625ab8ea, \g was
used as the way to push extended query into an ongoing pipeline.  \gx
was blocked.

These two meta-commands have format-related options that can be applied
when fetching a query result (expanded, etc.).  As the results of a
pipeline are fetched asynchronously, not at the moment of the
meta-command execution but at the moment of a \getresults or a
\endpipeline, authorizing \g while blocking \gx leads to a confusing
implementation, making one think that psql should be smart enough to
remember the output format options defined from the time when \g or \gx
were executed.  Doing so would lead to more code complications when
retrieving a batch of results.  There is an extra argument other than
simplicity here: the output format options defined at the point of a
\getresults or a \endpipeline execution should be what affect the output
format for a batch of results.

To avoid any confusion, we have settled to the introduction of a new
meta-command called \sendpipeline, replacing \g when within a pipeline.
An advantage of this design is that it is possible to add new options
specific to pipelines when sending a query buffer, independent of \g
and \gx, should it prove to be necessary.

Most of the changes of this commit happen in the regression tests, where
\g is replaced by \sendpipeline.  More tests are added to check that \g
is not allowed.

Per discussion between the author, Daniel Vérité and me.

Author: Anthonin Bonnefoy <anthonin.bonnefoy@datadoghq.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad4b9f1a-f7fe-4ab8-8546-90754726d0be@manitou-mail.org
2025-03-18 09:41:21 +09:00
Andres Freund
02844012b3 aio: Basic subsystem initialization
This commit just does the minimal wiring up of the AIO subsystem, added in the
next commit, to the rest of the system. The next commit contains more details
about motivation and architecture.

This commit is kept separate to make it easier to review, separating the
changes across the tree, from the implementation of the new subsystem.

We discussed squashing this commit with the main commit before merging AIO,
but there has been a mild preference for keeping it separate.

Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/uvrtrknj4kdytuboidbhwclo4gxhswwcpgadptsjvjqcluzmah%40brqs62irg4dt
2025-03-17 18:51:33 -04:00
Robert Haas
99aeb84703 pg_combinebackup: Add -k, --link option.
This is similar to pg_upgrade's --link option, except that here we won't
typically be able to use it for every input file: sometimes we will need
to reconstruct a complete backup from blocks stored in different files.
However, when a whole file does need to be copied, we can use an
optimized copying strategy: see the existing --clone and
--copy-file-range options and the code to use CopyFile() on Windows.
This commit adds a new strategy: add a hard link to an existing file.
Making a hard link doesn't actually copy anything, but it makes sense
for the code to treat it as doing so.

This is useful when the input directories are merely staging directories
that will be removed once the restore is complete. In such cases, there
is no need to actually copy the data, and making a bunch of new hard
links can be very quick. However, it would be quite dangerous to use it
if the input directories might later be reused for any other purpose,
since starting postgres on the output directory would destructively
modify the input directories. For that reason, using this new option
causes pg_combinebackup to emit a warning about the danger involved.

Author: Israel Barth Rubio <barthisrael@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com> (cosmetic changes)
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoaEFsYHsMefNaNkU=2SnMRufKE3eVJxvAaX=OWgcnPmPg@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-17 14:03:14 -04:00
Tom Lane
cd3c45125d pg_dump, pg_dumpall, pg_restore: Add --no-policies option.
Add --no-policies option to control row level security policy handling
in dump and restore operations. When this option is used, both CREATE
POLICY commands and ALTER TABLE ... ENABLE ROW LEVEL SECURITY commands
are excluded from dumps and skipped during restores.

This is useful in scenarios where policies need to be redefined in the
target system or when moving data between environments with different
security requirements.

Author: Nikolay Samokhvalov <nik@postgres.ai>
Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane <htamfids@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Jim Jones <jim.jones@uni-muenster.de>
Reviewed-by: newtglobal postgresql_contributors <postgresql_contributors@newtglobalcorp.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAM527d8kG2qPKvbfJ=OYJkT7iRNd623Bk+m-a4ngm+nyHYsHog@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-16 18:08:15 -04:00
Tom Lane
4489044239 contrib/isn: Make weak mode a GUC setting, and fix related functions.
isn's weak mode used to be a simple static variable, settable only
via the isn_weak(boolean) function.  This wasn't optimal, as this
means it doesn't respect transactions nor respond to RESET ALL.

This patch makes isn.weak a GUC parameter instead, so that
it acts like any other user-settable parameter.

The isn_weak() functions are retained for backwards compatibility.
But we must fix their volatility markings: they were marked IMMUTABLE
which is surely incorrect, and PARALLEL RESTRICTED which isn't right
for GUC-related functions either.  Mark isn_weak(boolean) as
VOLATILE and PARALLEL UNSAFE, matching set_config().  Mark isn_weak()
as STABLE and PARALLEL SAFE, matching current_setting().

Reported-by: Viktor Holmberg <v@viktorh.net>
Diagnosed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Author: Viktor Holmberg <v@viktorh.net>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/790bc1f9-74dc-4b50-94d2-8147315b1556@Spark
2025-03-16 13:45:48 -04:00
Álvaro Herrera
11bd831860
doc: Explain more thoroughly when a table rewrite is needed
Author: Masahiro Ikeda <ikedamsh@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/00e6eb5f5c793b8ef722252c7a519c9a@oss.nttdata.com
2025-03-14 20:44:59 +01:00
Fujii Masao
6d376c3b0d Add GUC option to log lock acquisition failures.
This commit introduces a new GUC, log_lock_failure, which controls whether
a detailed log message is produced when a lock acquisition fails. Currently,
it only supports logging lock failures caused by SELECT ... NOWAIT.

The log message includes information about all processes holding or
waiting for the lock that couldn't be acquired, helping users analyze and
diagnose the causes of lock failures.

Currently, this option does not log failures from SELECT ... SKIP LOCKED,
as that could generate excessive log messages if many locks are skipped,
causing unnecessary noise.

This mechanism can be extended in the future to support for logging
lock failures from other commands, such as LOCK TABLE ... NOWAIT.

Author: Yuki Seino <seinoyu@oss.nttdata.com>
Co-authored-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/411280a186cc26ef7034e0f2dfe54131@oss.nttdata.com
2025-03-14 23:14:12 +09:00
Nathan Bossart
0697b23906 Add reverse(bytea).
This commit introduces a function for reversing the order of the
bytes in binary strings.

Bumps catversion.

Author: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TMe0QVRuNssUArbMi0bJJK32%2BzNA3at5m3osrBQ25MHuw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-13 11:20:53 -05:00
Masahiko Sawada
4ecdd4110d pg_rewind: Add dbname to primary_conninfo when using --write-recovery-conf.
This commit enhances pg_rewind's --write-recovery-conf option to
include the dbname in the generated primary_conninfo value when
specified in the --source-server option. With this modification, the
rewound server can connect to the primary server without manual
configuration file modifications when sync_replication_slots is
enabled.

Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAkW=Ht0k9dVoBTCcqLiiZ2MXhVr+d=j2T_EZMerGrLWQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-12 16:56:04 -07:00
Melanie Plageman
ff79b5b2ab Increase default effective_io_concurrency to 16
The default effective_io_concurrency has been 1 since it was introduced
in b7b8f0b609. Referencing the associated discussion [1], it
seems 1 was chosen as a conservative value that seemed unlikely to cause
regressions.

Experimentation on high latency cloud storage as well as fast, local
nvme storage (see Discussion link) shows that even slightly higher
values improve query timings substantially. 1 actually performs worse
than 0 [2]. With effective_io_concurrency 1, we are not prefetching
enough to avoid I/O stalls, but we are issuing extra syscalls.

The new default is 16, which should be more appropriate for common
hardware while still avoiding flooding low IOPs devices with I/O
requests.

[1] https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/FDDBA24E-FF4D-4654-BA75-692B3BA71B97%40enterprisedb.com
[2] https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAAKRu_Zv08Cic%3DqdCfzrQabpEXGrd9Z9UOW5svEVkCM6%3DFXA9g%40mail.gmail.com

Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_Z%2BJa-mwXebOoOERMMUMvJeRhzTjad4dSThxG0JLXESxw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-12 15:57:44 -04:00
Melanie Plageman
18cd15e706 Add connection establishment duration logging
Add log_connections option 'setup_durations' which logs durations of
several key parts of connection establishment and backend setup.

For an incoming connection, starting from when the postmaster gets a
socket from accept() and ending when the forked child backend is first
ready for query, there are multiple steps that could each take longer
than expected due to external factors. This logging provides visibility
into authentication and fork duration as well as the end-to-end
connection establishment and backend initialization time.

To make this portable, the timings captured in the postmaster (socket
creation time, fork initiation time) are passed through the
BackendStartupData.

Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Guillaume Lelarge <guillaume.lelarge@dalibo.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_b_smAHK0ZjrnL5GRxnAVWujEXQWpLXYzGbmpcZd3nLYw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-12 11:35:27 -04:00
Melanie Plageman
9219093cab Modularize log_connections output
Convert the boolean log_connections GUC into a list GUC comprised of the
connection aspects to log.

This gives users more control over the volume and kind of connection
logging.

The current log_connections options are 'receipt', 'authentication', and
'authorization'. The empty string disables all connection logging. 'all'
enables all available connection logging.

For backwards compatibility, the most common values for the
log_connections boolean are still supported (on, off, 1, 0, true, false,
yes, no). Note that previously supported substrings of on, off, true,
false, yes, and no are no longer supported.

Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_b_smAHK0ZjrnL5GRxnAVWujEXQWpLXYzGbmpcZd3nLYw%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-12 11:35:21 -04:00
Tom Lane
c872516d8f Doc: silence A4 PDF build warnings.
Commit 0fbceae84 put a "&zwsp;" in almost but not quite the correct
place to avoid "The contents of fo:block line 1 exceed the available
area" warnings.  Per buildfarm.
2025-03-11 23:35:39 -04:00
Peter Geoghegan
0fbceae841 Show index search count in EXPLAIN ANALYZE, take 2.
Expose the count of index searches/index descents in EXPLAIN ANALYZE's
output for index scan/index-only scan/bitmap index scan nodes.  This
information is particularly useful with scans that use ScalarArrayOp
quals, where the number of index searches can be unpredictable due to
implementation details that interact with physical index characteristics
(at least with nbtree SAOP scans, since Postgres 17 commit 5bf748b8).
The information shown also provides useful context when EXPLAIN ANALYZE
runs a plan with an index scan node that successfully applied the skip
scan optimization (set to be added to nbtree by an upcoming patch).

The instrumentation works by teaching all index AMs to increment a new
nsearches counter whenever a new index search begins.  The counter is
incremented at exactly the same point that index AMs already increment
the pg_stat_*_indexes.idx_scan counter (we're counting the same event,
but at the scan level rather than the relation level).  Parallel queries
have workers copy their local counter struct into shared memory when an
index scan node ends -- even when it isn't a parallel aware scan node.
An earlier version of this patch that only worked with parallel aware
scans became commit 5ead85fb (though that was quickly reverted by commit
d00107cd following "debug_parallel_query=regress" buildfarm failures).

Our approach doesn't match the approach used when tracking other index
scan related costs (e.g., "Rows Removed by Filter:").  It is comparable
to the approach used in similar cases involving costs that are only
readily accessible inside an access method, not from the executor proper
(e.g., "Heap Blocks:" output for a Bitmap Heap Scan, which was recently
enhanced to show per-worker costs by commit 5a1e6df3, using essentially
the same scheme as the one used here).  It is necessary for index AMs to
have direct responsibility for maintaining the new counter, since the
counter might need to be incremented multiple times per amgettuple call
(or per amgetbitmap call).  But it is also necessary for the executor
proper to manage the shared memory now used to transfer each worker's
counter struct to the leader.

Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Reviewed-By: Masahiro Ikeda <ikedamsh@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkRqvaqR2CTNqTZP0z6FuL4-3ED6eQB0yx38XBNj1v-4Q@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=PKR6rB7qbx+Vnd7eqeB5VTcrW=iJvAsTsKbdG+kW_UA@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-11 09:20:50 -04:00
Michael Paquier
76def4cdd7 Add WAL data to backend statistics
This commit adds per-backend WAL statistics, providing the same
information as pg_stat_wal, except that it is now possible to know how
much WAL activity is happening in each backend rather than an overall
aggregate of all the activity.  Like pg_stat_wal, the implementation
relies on pgWalUsage, tracking the difference of activity between two
reports to pgstats.

This data can be retrieved with a new system function called
pg_stat_get_backend_wal(), that returns one tuple based on the PID
provided in input.  Like pg_stat_get_backend_io(), this is useful when
joined with pg_stat_activity to get a live picture of the WAL generated
for each running backend, showing how the activity is [un]balanced.

pgstat_flush_backend() gains a new flag value, able to control the flush
of the WAL stats.

This commit relies mostly on the infrastructure provided by
9aea73fc61, that has introduced backend statistics.

Bump catalog version.  A bump of PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID is not required,
as backend stats do not persist on disk.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Nazir Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Xuneng Zhou <xunengzhou@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z3zqc4o09dM/Ezyz@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-03-11 09:04:11 +09:00
Tom Lane
9f87e2593f Doc: improve description of window function processing.
The previous wording talked about a "single pass over the data",
which can be read as promising more than intended (to wit, that only
one WindowAgg plan node will be used).  What we promise is only what
the SQL spec requires, namely that the data not get re-sorted between
window functions with compatible PARTITION BY/ORDER BY clauses.
Adjust the wording in hopes of making this clearer.

Reported-by: Christopher Inokuchi <cinokuchi@gmail.com>
Author: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABde6B5va2wMsnM79u_x=n9KUgfKQje_pbLROEBmA9Ru5XWidw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-03-10 10:22:08 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
b83e8a2ca2 Remove support for temporal RESTRICT foreign keys
It isn't clear how these should behave, so let's wait to implement them
until we are sure how to do it.

This feature was initially added by commit 89f908a6d0, so it hasn't
been released yet.

Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e773bc11-4ac1-40de-bb91-814e02f05b6d%40eisentraut.org
2025-03-10 11:31:01 +01:00
Nathan Bossart
3c472a1829 doc: Adjust note about pg_upgrade's --jobs option.
Presently, this section lists a couple of parallelized parts of
pg_upgrade and suggests a starting point for setting the --jobs
option.  The list of parallelized tasks is not particularly
actionable, and the phrasing for the --jobs recommendation is
confusing to some readers.

This commit attempts to improve this section by eliminating the
list of parallelized tasks and instead highlighting that --jobs is
most useful for clusters with multiple databases or tablespaces.
Additionally, the recommendation for setting --jobs is simplified
to suggest starting with the number of CPU cores.

Reported-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z8dBn_5iGLNuYiPo%40nathan
2025-03-08 14:28:16 -06:00
Robert Haas
d3fc7a5120 doc: Add missing decimal places to example rowcount.
Commit 95dbd827f2 updated a bunch
of similar cases in the documentation, but missed this one.

Author: Ilia Evdokimov <ilya.evdokimov@tantorlabs.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
2025-03-07 09:00:53 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
af4002b381 Rename amcancrosscompare
After more discussion about commit ce62f2f2a0, rename the index AM
property amcancrosscompare to two separate properties
amconsistentequality and amconsistentordering.  Also improve the
documentation and update some comments that were previously missed.

Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E1tngY6-0000UL-2n%40gemulon.postgresql.org
2025-03-07 11:46:33 +01:00
Dean Rasheed
6da469bada Allow casting between bytea and integer types.
This allows smallint, integer, and bigint values to be cast to and
from bytea. The bytea value is the two's complement representation of
the integer, with the most significant byte first. For example:

  1234::bytea -> \x000004d2
  (-1234)::bytea -> \xfffffb2e

Author: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Reviewed-by: Joel Jacobson <joel@compiler.org>
Reviewed-by: Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TPtOp6%2BkFX5QX3fH1SVr7v65uHr-7yEJ%3DGMGQi5uhGtcA%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-07 09:31:18 +00:00
John Naylor
19e57f4f78 Revert "vacuumdb: Add option for analyzing only relations missing stats."
This reverts commit 5f8eb25706, which in
my branch by mistake.
2025-03-07 10:35:21 +07:00
John Naylor
fcabc3adf8 Doc: correct aggressive vacuum threshold for multixact members storage
The threshold is two billion members, which was interpreted as 2GB
in the documentation. Fix to reflect that each member takes up five
bytes, which translates to about 10GB. This is not exact, because of
page boundaries. While at it, mention the maximum size 20GB.

This has been wrong since commit c552e171d1, so backpatch to
version 14.

Author: Alex Friedman <alexf01@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACbFw60UOk6fCC02KsyT3OfU9Dnuq5roYxdw2aFisiN_p1L0bg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 14
2025-03-07 10:22:56 +07:00
Nathan Bossart
5f8eb25706 vacuumdb: Add option for analyzing only relations missing stats.
This commit adds a new --missing-only option that can be used in
conjunction with --analyze-only and --analyze-in-stages.  When this
option is specified, vacuumdb will generate ANALYZE commands for a
relation if it is missing any statistics it should ordinarily have.
For example, if a table has statistics for one column but not
another, we will analyze the whole table.  A similar principle
applies to extended statistics, expression indexes, and table
inheritance.

Co-authored-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: TODO
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z5O1bpcwDrMgyrYy%40nathan
2025-03-07 10:17:35 +07:00
Andrew Dunstan
e33969abc1 Further fix for json_strip_nulls documentation
Oversight in commit 4603903d29.

Author: Shinoda, Noriyoshi (SXD Japan FSI) <noriyoshi.shinoda@hpe.com>
2025-03-06 10:24:03 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
0e76f253f4 Remove extraneous commas in json{b}_strip_nulls documentation
Oversight in commit 4603903d29.

Author: Ian Lawrence Barwick <barwick@gmail.com>
2025-03-06 08:46:15 -05:00
Peter Geoghegan
d00107cd63 Revert "Show index search count in EXPLAIN ANALYZE."
This reverts commit 5ead85fbc8.

This commit shows test failures with debug_parallel_query=regress.  The
underlying issue needs to be debugged, so revert for now.
2025-03-05 10:27:31 -05:00
Andrew Dunstan
4603903d29 Allow json{b}_strip_nulls to remove null array elements
An additional paramater ("strip_in_arrays") is added to these functions.
It defaults to false. If true, then null array elements are removed as
well as null valued object fields. JSON that just consists of a single
null is not affected.

Author: Florents Tselai <florents.tselai@gmail.com>

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4BCECCD5-4F40-4313-9E98-9E16BEB0B01D@gmail.com
2025-03-05 10:04:02 -05:00
Peter Geoghegan
5ead85fbc8 Show index search count in EXPLAIN ANALYZE.
Expose the count of index searches/index descents in EXPLAIN ANALYZE's
output for index scan nodes.  This information is particularly useful
with scans that use ScalarArrayOp quals, where the number of index scans
isn't predictable in advance (at least not with optimizations like the
one added to nbtree by Postgres 17 commit 5bf748b8).  It will also be
useful when EXPLAIN ANALYZE shows details of an nbtree index scan that
uses skip scan optimizations set to be introduced by an upcoming patch.

The instrumentation works by teaching index AMs to increment a new
nsearches counter whenever a new index search begins.  The counter is
incremented at exactly the same point that index AMs must already
increment the index's pg_stat_*_indexes.idx_scan counter (we're counting
the same event, but at the scan level rather than the relation level).
The new counter is stored in the scan descriptor (IndexScanDescData),
which explain.c reaches by going through the scan node's PlanState.

This approach doesn't match the approach used when tracking other index
scan specific costs (e.g., "Rows Removed by Filter:").  It is similar to
the approach used in other cases where we must track costs that are only
readily accessible inside an access method, and not from the executor
(e.g., "Heap Blocks:" output for a Bitmap Heap Scan).  It is inherently
necessary to maintain a counter that can be incremented multiple times
during a single amgettuple call (or amgetbitmap call), and directly
exposing PlanState.instrument to index access methods seems unappealing.

Author: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-By: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Reviewed-By: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-By: Masahiro Ikeda <ikedamsh@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-By: Matthias van de Meent <boekewurm+postgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=PKR6rB7qbx+Vnd7eqeB5VTcrW=iJvAsTsKbdG+kW_UA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkRqvaqR2CTNqTZP0z6FuL4-3ED6eQB0yx38XBNj1v-4Q@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-05 09:36:48 -05:00
Álvaro Herrera
f4e53e10b6
Add ALTER TABLE ... ALTER CONSTRAINT ... SET [NO] INHERIT
This allows to redefine an existing non-inheritable constraint to be
inheritable, which allows to straighten up situations with NO INHERIT
constraints so that thay can become normal constraints without having to
re-verify existing data.  For existing inheritance children this may
require creating additional constraints, if they don't exist already.

It also allows to do the opposite, if only for symmetry.

Author: Suraj Kharage <suraj.kharage@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAF1DzPVfOW6Kk=7SSh7LbneQDJWh=PbJrEC_Wkzc24tHOyQWGg@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-05 13:50:22 +01:00
Daniel Gustafsson
ad13490be0 doc: Expand version compatibility for pg_basebackup features
This updates the paragraph on backwards compatitibility for server
features to include --incremental which only works on servers with
v17 or newer.  Backpatch down to v17 where incremental backup was
added.

Author: David G. Johnston <David.G.Johnston@Gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwZYfZyeTkS3g2Ovw84TsxHa796xnf-u5kfgn_auyxZk0Q@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 17
2025-03-04 12:08:27 +01:00
Michael Paquier
c76db55c90 Split pgstat_bestart() into three different routines
pgstat_bestart(), used post-authentication to set up a backend entry
in the PgBackendStatus array, so as its data becomes visible in
pg_stat_activity and related catalogs, has its logic divided into three
routines with this commit, called in order at different steps of the
backend initialization:
* pgstat_bestart_initial() sets up the backend entry with a minimal
amount of information, reporting it with a new BackendState called
STATE_STARTING while waiting for backend initialization and client
authentication to complete.  The main benefit that this offers is
observability, so as it is possible to monitor the backend activity
during authentication.  This step happens earlier than in the logic
prior to this commit.  pgstat_beinit() happens earlier as well, before
authentication.
* pgstat_bestart_security() reports the SSL/GSS status of the
connection, once authentication completes.  Auxiliary processes, for
example, do not need to call this step, hence it is optional.  This
step is called after performing authentication, same as previously.
* pgstat_bestart_final() reports the user and database IDs, takes the
entry out of STATE_STARTING, and reports its application_name.  This is
called as the last step of the three, once authentication completes.

An injection point is added, with a test checking that the "starting"
phase of a backend entry is visible in pg_stat_activity.  Some follow-up
patches are planned to take advantage of this refactoring with more
information provided in backend entries during authentication (LDAP
hanging was a problem for the author, initially).

Author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOYmi+=60deN20WDyCoHCiecgivJxr=98s7s7-C8SkXwrCfHXg@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-04 14:09:44 +09:00
Masahiko Sawada
ba57dcfdcd doc: Convert UUID functions list to table format.
Convert the list of UUID functions into a table for better
readability. This commit also adds references to the UUID type section
and includes descriptions of different UUID generation algorithm
versions.

Author: Andy Alsup <bluesbreaker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADOZ7s7OHag+r6w+BzKw2xgb3fVtAD-pU=_N9-9pSe5W1TB+xQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-03 15:44:01 -08:00
Tom Lane
246dedc5d0 Allow => syntax for named cursor arguments in plpgsql.
We've traditionally accepted "name := value" syntax for
cursor arguments in plpgsql.  But it turns out that the
equivalent statements in Oracle use "name => value".
Since we accept both forms of punctuation for function
arguments, it makes sense to do the same here.

Author: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Gilles Darold <gilles@darold.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRA3d0ARQEMbABa1n6q25AUdNmyO8aGs56XNf9pD4sRMjQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-03 18:00:13 -05:00
Melanie Plageman
06eae9e621 Trigger more frequent autovacuums with relallfrozen
Calculate the insert threshold for triggering an autovacuum of a
relation based on the number of unfrozen pages.

By only considering the unfrozen portion of the table when calculating
how many tuples to add to the insert threshold, we can trigger more
frequent vacuums of insert-heavy tables. This increases the chances of
vacuuming those pages when they still reside in shared buffers

This also increases the number of autovacuums triggered by tuples
inserted and not by wraparound risk. We prefer to freeze these pages
during insert-triggered autovacuums, as anti-wraparound vacuums are not
automatically canceled by conflicting lock requests.

We calculate the unfrozen percentage of the table using the recently
added (99f8f3fbbc) relallfrozen column of pg_class.

Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane <htamfids@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Reviewed-by: wenhui qiu <qiuwenhuifx@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_aj-P7YyBz_cPNwztz6ohP%2BvWis%3Diz3YcomkB3NpYA--w%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-03 14:42:00 -05:00
Melanie Plageman
99f8f3fbbc Add relallfrozen to pg_class
Add relallfrozen, an estimate of the number of pages marked all-frozen
in the visibility map.

pg_class already has relallvisible, an estimate of the number of pages
in the relation marked all-visible in the visibility map. This is used
primarily for planning.

relallfrozen, together with relallvisible, is useful for estimating the
outstanding number of all-visible but not all-frozen pages in the
relation for the purposes of scheduling manual VACUUMs and tuning vacuum
freeze parameters.

A future commit will use relallfrozen to trigger more frequent vacuums
on insert-focused workloads with significant volume of frozen data.

Bump catalog version

Author: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane <htamfids@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_aj-P7YyBz_cPNwztz6ohP%2BvWis%3Diz3YcomkB3NpYA--w%40mail.gmail.com
2025-03-03 11:18:05 -05:00
Fujii Masao
fe186bda78 postgres_fdw: Extend postgres_fdw_get_connections to return remote backend PID.
This commit adds a new "remote_backend_pid" output column to
the postgres_fdw_get_connections function. It returns the process ID of
the remote backend, on the foreign server, handling the connection.

This enhancement is useful for troubleshooting, monitoring, and reporting.
For example, if a connection is unexpectedly closed by the foreign server,
the remote backend's PID can help diagnose the cause.

No extension version bump is needed, as commit c297a47c5f already
handled it for v18~.

Author: Sagar Dilip Shedge <sagar.shedge92@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPhYifF25q5xUQWXETfKwhc0YVa_6+tfG9Kw4bCvCjpCWxYs2A@mail.gmail.com
2025-03-03 08:51:30 +09:00
Robert Haas
95dbd827f2 EXPLAIN: Always use two fractional digits for row counts.
Commit ddb17e387a attempted to avoid
confusing users by displaying digits after the decimal point only when
nloops > 1, since it's impossible to have a fraction row count after a
single iteration. However, this made the regression tests unstable since
parallal queries will have nloops>1 for all nodes below the Gather or
Gather Merge in normal cases, but if the workers don't start in time and
the leader finishes all the work, they will suddenly have nloops==1,
making it unpredictable whether the digits after the decimal point would
be displayed or not. Although 44cbba9a7f
seemed to fix the immediate failures, it may still be the case that there
are lower-probability failures elsewhere in the regression tests.

Various fixes are possible here. For example, it has previously been
proposed that we should try to display the digits after the decimal
point only if rows/nloops is an integer, but currently rows is storead
as a float so it's not theoretically an exact quantity -- precision
could be lost in extreme cases. It has also been proposed that we
should try to display the digits after the decimal point only if we're
under some sort of construct that could potentially cause looping
regardless of whether it actually does. While such ideas are not
without merit, this patch adopts the much simpler solution of always
display two decimal digits. If that approach stands up to scrutiny
from the buildfarm and human users, it spares us the trouble of doing
anything more complex; if not, we can reassess.

This commit incidentally reverts 44cbba9a7f,
which should no longer be needed.

Author: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Author: Ilia Evdokimov <ilya.evdokimov@tantorlabs.com>
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoazzVHn8sFOMFAEwoqBTDxKT45D7mvkyeHgqtoD2cn58Q@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-27 11:27:16 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
ce62f2f2a0 Generalize hash and ordering support in amapi
Stop comparing access method OID values against HASH_AM_OID and
BTREE_AM_OID, and instead check the IndexAmRoutine for an index to see
if it advertises its ability to perform the necessary ordering,
hashing, or cross-type comparing functionality.  A field amcanorder
already existed, this uses it more widely.  Fields amcanhash and
amcancrosscompare are added for the other purposes.

Author: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E72EAA49-354D-4C2E-8EB9-255197F55330@enterprisedb.com
2025-02-27 17:03:31 +01:00
Amit Kapila
845511a72a Doc: Additional clarification for -d option of pg_createsubscriber.
Author: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm0zsFUYpe-tLha+-sp3K8KmBXu0o=LUN=8FFtxMLYikPA@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-27 08:50:03 +05:30
Tom Lane
40e27d04b4 Use attnum to identify index columns in pg_restore_attribute_stats().
Previously we used attname for both table and index columns, but
that is problematic for indexes because their attnames are assigned
by internal rules that don't guarantee to preserve the names across
dump and reload.  (This is what's causing the remaining buildfarm
failures in cross-version-upgrade tests.)  Fortunately we can use
attnum instead, since there's no such thing as adding or dropping
columns in an existing index.  We met this same problem previously
with ALTER INDEX ... SET STATISTICS, and solved it the same way,
cf commit 5b6d13eec.

In pg_restore_attribute_stats() itself, we accept either attnum or
attname, but the policy used by pg_dump is to always use attname
for tables and attnum for indexes.

Author: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Author: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1457469.1740419458@sss.pgh.pa.us
2025-02-26 16:36:20 -05:00
Amit Kapila
e117cfb2f6 Add two-phase option in pg_createsubscriber.
This patch introduces the '--enable-two-phase' option to the
'pg_createsubscriber' utility, allowing users to enable two-phase commit
for all subscriptions during their creation.

Note that even without this option users can enable the two_phase option
for the subscriptions created by pg_createsubscriber. However, it requires
the subscription to be disabled first which could be inconvenient for
users.

When two-phase commit is enabled, prepared transactions are sent to the
subscriber at the time of 'PREPARE TRANSACTION', and they are processed as
two-phase transactions on the subscriber as well. If disabled, prepared
transactions are sent only when committed and are processed immediately by
the subscriber.

Author: Shubham Khanna <khannashubham1197@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ajin Cherian <itsajin@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHv8RjLPdFP=kA5LNSmWZ=+GMXmO+LczvV6p9HJjsXxZz10KGA@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-26 11:12:50 +05:30
Michael Paquier
6c349d83b6 Re-add GUC track_wal_io_timing
This commit is a rework of 2421e9a51d, about which Andres Freund has
raised some concerns as it is valuable to have both track_io_timing and
track_wal_io_timing in some cases, as the WAL write and fsync paths can
be a major bottleneck for some workloads.  Hence, it can be relevant to
not calculate the WAL timings in environments where pg_test_timing
performs poorly while capturing some IO data under track_io_timing for
the non-WAL IO paths.  The opposite can be also true: it should be
possible to disable the non-WAL timings and enable the WAL timings (the
previous GUC setups allowed this possibility).

track_wal_io_timing is added back in this commit, controlling if WAL
timings should be calculated in pg_stat_io for the read, fsync and write
paths, as done previously with pg_stat_wal.  pg_stat_wal previously
tracked only the sync and write parts (now removed), read stats is new
data tracked in pg_stat_io, all three are aggregated if
track_wal_io_timing is enabled.  The read part matters during recovery
or if a XLogReader is used.

Extra note: more control over if the types of timings calculated in
pg_stat_io could be done with a GUC that lists pairs of (IOObject,IOOp).

Reported-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3opf2wh2oljco6ldyqf7ukabw3jijnnhno6fjb4mlu6civ5h24@fcwmhsgmlmzu
2025-02-26 09:49:59 +09:00
Jeff Davis
a5cbdeb98a Remove redundant pg_set_*_stats() variants.
After commit f3dae2ae58, the primary purpose of separating the
pg_set_*_stats() from the pg_restore_*_stats() variants was
eliminated.

Leave pg_restore_relation_stats() and pg_restore_attribute_stats(),
which satisfy both purposes, and remove pg_set_relation_stats() and
pg_set_attribute_stats().

Reviewed-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1457469.1740419458@sss.pgh.pa.us
2025-02-25 16:15:47 -08:00
Amit Kapila
5b8f2ccc0a Doc: Fix pg_copy_logical_replication_slot description.
This commit documents that the failover option is not copied when using
the pg_copy_logical_replication_slot function.

In passing, we modify the comments in the function clarifying the reason
for this behavior.

Reported-by: <duffieldzane@gmail.com>
Author: Hou Zhijie <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Backpatch-through: 17, where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173976850802.682632.11315364077431550250@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2025-02-25 09:42:07 +05:30
Jeff Davis
15601fa21a Missing doc update for f3dae2ae58. 2025-02-24 17:27:32 -08:00
Michael Paquier
3ce357584e psql: Add pipeline status to prompt and some state variables
This commit adds %P to psql prompts, able to report the status of a
pipeline depending on PQpipelineStatus(): on, off or abort.

The following variables are added to report the state of an ongoing
pipeline:
- PIPELINE_SYNC_COUNT: reports the number of piped syncs.
- PIPELINE_COMMAND_COUNT: reports the number of piped commands, a
command being either \bind, \bind_named, \close or \parse.
- PIPELINE_RESULT_COUNT: reports the results available to read with
\getresults.

These variables can be used with \echo or in a prompt, using "%:name:"
in PROMPT1, PROMPT2 or PROMPT3.  Some basic regression tests are added
for these.  The suggestion to use variables to show the details about
the status counters comes from me.  The original patch proposed was less
extensible, hardcoding the output in the prompt.

Author: Anthonin Bonnefoy <anthonin.bonnefoy@datadoghq.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO6_XqroE7JuMEm1sWz55rp9fAYX2JwmcP_3m_v51vnOFdsLiQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-25 10:07:24 +09:00
Daniel Gustafsson
03366b61df oauth: Fix incorrect const markers in struct
Two members in PGoauthBearerRequest were incorrectly marked as const.
While in there, align the name of the struct with the typedef as per
project style.

Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/912516.1740329361@sss.pgh.pa.us
2025-02-24 22:20:29 +01:00
Michael Paquier
2421e9a51d Remove read/sync fields from pg_stat_wal and GUC track_wal_io_timing
The four following attributes are removed from pg_stat_wal:
* wal_write
* wal_sync
* wal_write_time
* wal_sync_time

a051e71e28 has added an equivalent of this information in pg_stat_io
with more granularity as this now spreads across the backend types, IO
context and IO objects.  So, keeping the same information in pg_stat_wal
has little benefits.

Another benefit of this commit is the removal of PendingWalStats,
simplifying an upcoming patch to add per-backend WAL statistics, which
already support IO statistics and which have access to the write/sync
stats data of WAL.

The GUC track_wal_io_timing, that was used to enable or disable the
aggregation of the write and sync timings for WAL, is also removed.
pgstat_prepare_io_time() is simplified.

Bump catalog version.
Bump PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID, due to the update of PgStat_WalStats.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z7RkQ0EfYaqqjgz/@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-24 09:51:56 +09:00
Jeff Davis
cb45dc3afb Documentation fixups for dumping statistics.
Reported-by: Hayato Kuroda (Fujitsu) <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reported-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew@dunslane.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSCPR01MB149665630030E7F54FDA8B27BF5C72@OSCPR01MB14966.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/25d26774-25fa-46f2-9888-c6a707d1fef7@dunslane.net
2025-02-22 10:03:11 -08:00
Álvaro Herrera
bba2fbc623
Change \conninfo to use tabular format
(Initially the proposal was to keep \conninfo alone and add this feature
as \conninfo+, but we decided against keeping the original.)

Also display more fields than before, though not as many as were
suggested during the discussion.  In particular, we don't show 'role'
nor 'session authorization', for both which a case can probably be made.
These can be added as followup commits, if we agree to it.

Some (most?) reviewers actually reviewed rather different versions of
the patch and do not necessarily endorse the current one.

Co-authored-by: Maiquel Grassi <grassi@hotmail.com.br>
Co-authored-by: Hunaid Sohail <hunaidpgml@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <simseih@amazon.com>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Jim Jones <jim.jones@uni-muenster.de>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Luzanov <p.luzanov@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Erik Wienhold <ewie@ewie.name>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CP8P284MB24965CB63DAC00FC0EA4A475EC462@CP8P284MB2496.BRAP284.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
2025-02-22 10:05:26 +01:00
Tom Lane
98fc31d649 Avoid race condition between "GRANT role" and "DROP ROLE".
Concurrently dropping either the granted role or the grantee
does not stop GRANT from completing, instead resulting in a
dangling role reference in pg_auth_members.  That's relatively
harmless in the short run, but inconsistent catalog entries
are not a good thing.

This patch solves the problem by adding the granted and grantee
roles as explicit shared dependencies of the pg_auth_members entry.
That's a bit indirect, but it works because the pg_shdepend code
applies the necessary locking and rechecking.

Commit 6566133c5 previously established similar handling for
the grantor column of pg_auth_members; it's not clear why it
didn't cover the other two role OID columns.

A side-effect of this approach is that DROP OWNED BY will now drop
pg_auth_members entries that mention the target role as either the
granted or grantee role.  That's clearly appropriate for the
grantee, since we'll drop its other privileges too.  It doesn't
seem too far out of line for the granted role, since we're
presumably about to drop it and besides we're removing all reasons
why it'd matter to be a member of it.  (One could argue that this
makes DropRole's code to auto-drop pg_auth_members entries
unnecessary, but I chose to leave it in place since perhaps some
people's workflows expect that to work without a DROP OWNED BY.)

Note to patch readers: CreateRole's first CommandCounterIncrement
call is now unconditional, because this change creates another
case in which it's needed, and it seemed to be more trouble than
it's worth to preserve that micro-optimization.

Arguably this is a bug fix, but the fact that it changes the
expected contents of pg_shdepend seems like not a great thing
to do in the stable branches, and perhaps we don't want the
change in DROP OWNED BY semantics there either.  On the other
hand, I opted not to force a catversion bump in HEAD, because
the presence or absence of these entries doesn't matter for
most purposes.

Reported-by: Virender Singla <virender.cse@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAM6Zo8woa62ZFHtMKox6a4jb8qQ=w87R2L0K8347iE-juQL2EA@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-21 17:07:01 -05:00
Masahiko Sawada
1aab680591 pg_upgrade: Add --set-char-signedness to set the default char signedness of new cluster.
This change adds a new option --set-char-signedness to pg_upgrade. It
enables user to set arbitrary signedness during pg_upgrade. This helps
cases where user who knew they copied the v17 source cluster from
x86 (signedness=true) to ARM (signedness=false) can pg_upgrade
properly without the prerequisite of acquiring an x86 VM.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CB11ADBC-0C3F-4FE0-A678-666EE80CBB07%40amazon.com
2025-02-21 10:23:39 -08:00
Masahiko Sawada
30666d1857 pg_resetwal: Add --char-signedness option to change the default char signedness.
With the newly added option --char-signedness, pg_resetwal updates the
default char signedness flag in the controlfile. This option is
primarily intended for an upcoming patch that pg_upgrade supports
preserving the default char signedness during upgrades, and is not
meant for manual operation.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CB11ADBC-0C3F-4FE0-A678-666EE80CBB07%40amazon.com
2025-02-21 10:14:36 -08:00
Masahiko Sawada
44fe30fdab Add default_char_signedness field to ControlFileData.
The signedness of the 'char' type in C is
implementation-dependent. For instance, 'signed char' is used by
default on x86 CPUs, while 'unsigned char' is used on aarch
CPUs. Previously, we accidentally let C implementation signedness
affect persistent data. This led to inconsistent results when
comparing char data across different platforms.

This commit introduces a new 'default_char_signedness' field in
ControlFileData to store the signedness of the 'char' type. While this
change does not encourage the use of 'char' without explicitly
specifying its signedness, this field can be used as a hint to ensure
consistent behavior for pre-v18 data files that store data sorted by
the 'char' type on disk (e.g., GIN and GiST indexes), especially in
cross-platform replication scenarios.

Newly created database clusters unconditionally set the default char
signedness to true. pg_upgrade (with an upcoming commit) changes this
flag for clusters if the source database cluster has
signedness=false. As a result, signedness=false setting will become
rare over time. If we had known about the problem during the last
development cycle that forced initdb (v8.3), we would have made all
clusters signed or all clusters unsigned. Making pg_upgrade the only
source of signedness=false will cause the population of database
clusters to converge toward that retrospective ideal.

Bump catalog version (for the catalog changes) and PG_CONTROL_VERSION
(for the additions in ControlFileData).

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch <noah@leadboat.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CB11ADBC-0C3F-4FE0-A678-666EE80CBB07%40amazon.com
2025-02-21 10:12:08 -08:00
Bruce Momjian
901a1cf8b4 doc: clarify default checksum behavior in non-master branches
Also simplify and correct data checksum wording in master now that it is
the default.  PG 13 did not have the awkward wording.

Reported-by: Felix <afripowered@gmail.com>

Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173928241056.707.3989867022954178032@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 14
2025-02-21 13:03:29 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
6ea0734e41 doc: remove non-breaking space in SGML files, causes make error 2025-02-21 12:15:53 -05:00
Daniel Gustafsson
41336bf085 doc: Add links to olsen93 and ong90 in bibliography
The bibliography entries for olsen93 and ong90 lacked links to
online copies.  While ong90 is available in digital form, the
olsen93 thesis is only available as a physical copy in the UCB
library.  To save people from searching for it, we still link
to it via the UCB library page.

Reported-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxFcJYdRvzgt59N26XjFp2tFFUXu+VN+x8Uo0NbDUCMCbw@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-21 11:28:42 +01:00
Amit Kapila
b4e0d0c53f Fix a WARNING for data origin discrepancies.
Previously, a WARNING was issued at the time of defining a subscription
with origin=NONE only when the publisher subscribed to the same table from
other publishers, indicating potential data origination from different
origins. However, the publisher can subscribe to the partition ancestors
or partition children of the table from other publishers, which could also
result in mixed-origin data inclusion. So, give a WARNING in those cases
as well.

Reported-by: Sergey Tatarintsev <s.tatarintsev@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Hou Zhijie <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Author: Shlok Kyal <shlok.kyal.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Backpatch-through: 16, where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5eda6a9c-63cf-404d-8a49-8dcb116a29f3@postgrespro.ru
2025-02-21 14:34:40 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
7d6d2c4bbd Drop opcintype from index AM strategy translation API
The type argument wasn't actually really necessary.  It was a remnant
of converting the API of the gist strategy translation from using
opclass to using opfamily+opcintype (commits c09e5a6a01,
622f678c10).  For looking up the gist translation function, we used
the convention "amproclefttype = amprocrighttype = opclass's
opcintype" (see pg_amproc.h).  But each operator family should only
have one translation function, and getting the right type for the
lookup is sometimes cumbersome and fragile, so this is all
unnecessarily complicated.

To simplify this, change the gist stategy support procedure to take
"any", "any" as argument.  (This is arbitrary but seems intuitive.
The alternative of using InvalidOid as argument(s) upsets various DDL
commands, so it's not practical.)  Then we don't need opcintype for
the lookup, and we can remove it from all the API layers introduced by
commit c09e5a6a01.

This also adds some more documentation about the correct signature of
the gist support function and adds more checks in gistvalidate().
This was previously underspecified.  (It relied implicitly on
convention mentioned above.)

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E72EAA49-354D-4C2E-8EB9-255197F55330@enterprisedb.com
2025-02-21 09:07:16 +01:00
Michael Paquier
41625ab8ea psql: Add support for pipelines
With \bind, \parse, \bind_named and \close, it is possible to issue
queries from psql using the extended protocol.  However, it was not
possible to send these queries using libpq's pipeline mode.  This
feature has two advantages:
- Testing.  Pipeline tests were only possible with pgbench, using TAP
tests.  It now becomes possible to have more SQL tests that are able to
stress the backend with pipelines and extended queries.  More tests will
be added in a follow-up commit that were discussed on some other
threads.  Some external projects in the community had to implement their
own facility to work around this limitation.
- Emulation of custom workloads, with more control over the actions
taken by a client with libpq APIs.  It is possible to emulate more
workload patterns to bottleneck the backend with the extended query
protocol.

This patch adds six new meta-commands to be able to control pipelines:
* \startpipeline starts a new pipeline.  All extended queries are queued
until the end of the pipeline are reached or a sync request is sent and
processed.
* \endpipeline ends an existing pipeline.  All queued commands are sent
to the server and all responses are processed by psql.
* \syncpipeline queues a synchronisation request, without flushing the
commands to the server, equivalent of PQsendPipelineSync().
* \flush, equivalent of PQflush().
* \flushrequest, equivalent of PQsendFlushRequest()
* \getresults reads the server's results for the queries in a pipeline.
Unsent data is automatically pushed when \getresults is called.  It is
possible to control the number of results read in a single meta-command
execution with an optional parameter, 0 means that all the results
should be read.

Author: Anthonin Bonnefoy <anthonin.bonnefoy@datadoghq.com>
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Kirill Reshke <reshkekirill@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO6_XqroE7JuMEm1sWz55rp9fAYX2JwmcP_3m_v51vnOFdsLiQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-21 11:19:59 +09:00
Daniel Gustafsson
b3f0be788a Add support for OAUTHBEARER SASL mechanism
This commit implements OAUTHBEARER, RFC 7628, and OAuth 2.0 Device
Authorization Grants, RFC 8628.  In order to use this there is a
new pg_hba auth method called oauth.  When speaking to a OAuth-
enabled server, it looks a bit like this:

  $ psql 'host=example.org oauth_issuer=... oauth_client_id=...'
  Visit https://oauth.example.org/login and enter the code: FPQ2-M4BG

Device authorization is currently the only supported flow so the
OAuth issuer must support that in order for users to authenticate.
Third-party clients may however extend this and provide their own
flows.  The built-in device authorization flow is currently not
supported on Windows.

In order for validation to happen server side a new framework for
plugging in OAuth validation modules is added.  As validation is
implementation specific, with no default specified in the standard,
PostgreSQL does not ship with one built-in.  Each pg_hba entry can
specify a specific validator or be left blank for the validator
installed as default.

This adds a requirement on libcurl for the client side support,
which is optional to build, but the server side has no additional
build requirements.  In order to run the tests, Python is required
as this adds a https server written in Python.  Tests are gated
behind PG_TEST_EXTRA as they open ports.

This patch has been a multi-year project with many contributors
involved with reviews and in-depth discussions:  Michael Paquier,
Heikki Linnakangas, Zhihong Yu, Mahendrakar Srinivasarao, Andrey
Chudnovsky and Stephen Frost to name a few.  While Jacob Champion
is the main author there have been some levels of hacking by others.
Daniel Gustafsson contributed the validation module and various bits
and pieces; Thomas Munro wrote the client side support for kqueue.

Author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Co-authored-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Co-authored-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Antonin Houska <ah@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Kashif Zeeshan <kashi.zeeshan@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d1b467a78e0e36ed85a09adf979d04cf124a9d4b.camel@vmware.com
2025-02-20 16:25:17 +01:00
Jeff Davis
1fd1bd8710 Transfer statistics during pg_upgrade.
Add support to pg_dump for dumping stats, and use that during
pg_upgrade so that statistics are transferred during upgrade. In most
cases this removes the need for a costly re-analyze after upgrade.

Some statistics are not transferred, such as extended statistics or
statistics with a custom stakind.

Now pg_dump accepts the options --schema-only, --no-schema,
--data-only, --no-data, --statistics-only, and --no-statistics; which
allow all combinations of schema, data, and/or stats. The options are
named this way to preserve compatibility with the previous
--schema-only and --data-only options.

Statistics are in SECTION_DATA, unless the object itself is in
SECTION_POST_DATA.

The stats are represented as calls to pg_restore_relation_stats() and
pg_restore_attribute_stats().

Author: Corey Huinker, Jeff Davis
Reviewed-by: Jian He
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=fzX7QX6r78fShWDjNN3Vcr4PVAnvXxQ4DiGy6V=0bCUA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM%3DcB0rF3p_FuWRTMSV0983ihTRpsH%2BOCpNyiqE7Wk0vUWA%40mail.gmail.com
2025-02-20 01:29:06 -08:00
Michael Paquier
f11674f8df doc: Fix typo in section "WAL configuration"
pg_stat_io has an attribute named fsync_time, not sync_time.

Oversight in 2f70871c2b.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z7RkQ0EfYaqqjgz/@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-20 14:22:00 +09:00
Michael Paquier
4538bd3f1d doc: Add details about object "wal" in pg_stat_io
This commit adds a short description of what kind of activity is tracked
in pg_stat_io for the object "wal", with a link pointing to the section
"WAL configuration" that has a lot of details on the matter.

This should perhaps have been added in a051e71e28, but things are what
they are.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z7RkQ0EfYaqqjgz/@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-20 14:16:23 +09:00
Michael Paquier
2f70871c2b doc: Recommend pg_stat_io rather than pg_stat_wal in WAL configuration
Since a051e71e28, pg_stat_io is able to track statistics for the WAL
activity, providing an equivalent of pg_stat_wal with more granularity
for the fsyncs/writes counts and timings, as the data is split across
backend types.

This commit now recommends pg_stat_io rather than pg_stat_wal in the
section "WAL configuration", some of the latter's attributes being
candidate for removal in a follow-up commit.

Extracted from a larger patch by the same author.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z7RkQ0EfYaqqjgz/@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-20 13:55:00 +09:00
Michael Paquier
302cf15759 Add support for LIKE in CREATE FOREIGN TABLE
LIKE enables the creation of foreign tables based on the column
definitions, constraints and objects of the defined source relation(s).

This feature mirrors the behavior of CREATE TABLE LIKE, but ignores
the INCLUDING sub-options that do not make sense for foreign tables:
INDEXES, COMPRESSION, IDENTITY and STORAGE.  The supported sub-options
are COMMENTS, CONSTRAINTS, DEFAULTS, GENERATED and STATISTICS, mapping
with the clauses already supported by the command.

Note that the restriction with LIKE in CREATE FOREIGN TABLE was added in
a0c6dfeecf.

Author: Zhang Mingli
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Sami Imseih, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/42d3f855-2275-4361-a42a-826172ca2dc4@Spark
2025-02-19 15:50:37 +09:00
Amit Langote
e7563e3c75 doc: Fix some issues with JSON_TABLE() examples
1. Remove an unused PASSING variable.

 2. Adjust formatting of JSON data used in an example to be valid
    under strict mode

Reported-by: Miłosz Chmura <mieszko4@gmail.com>
Author: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173859550337.1071.4748984213168572913@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2025-02-19 15:08:17 +09:00
Amit Kapila
ac0e33136a Invalidate inactive replication slots.
This commit introduces idle_replication_slot_timeout GUC that allows
inactive slots to be invalidated at the time of checkpoint. Because
checkpoints happen checkpoint_timeout intervals, there can be some lag
between when the idle_replication_slot_timeout was exceeded and when the
slot invalidation is triggered at the next checkpoint. To avoid such lags,
users can force a checkpoint to promptly invalidate inactive slots.

Note that the idle timeout invalidation mechanism is not applicable for
slots that do not reserve WAL or for slots on the standby server that are
synced from the primary server (i.e., standby slots having 'synced' field
'true'). Synced slots are always considered to be inactive because they
don't perform logical decoding to produce changes.

The slots can become inactive for a long period if a subscriber is down
due to a system error or inaccessible because of network issues. If such a
situation persists, it might be more practical to recreate the subscriber
rather than attempt to recover the node and wait for it to catch up which
could be time-consuming.

Then, external tools could create replication slots (e.g., for migrations
or upgrades) that may fail to remove them if an error occurs, leaving
behind unused slots that take up space and resources. Manually cleaning
them up can be tedious and error-prone, and without intervention, these
lingering slots can cause unnecessary WAL retention and system bloat.

As the duration of idle_replication_slot_timeout is in minutes, any test
using that would be time-consuming. We are planning to commit a follow up
patch for tests by using the injection point framework.

Author: Nisha Moond <nisha.moond412@gmail.com>
Author: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALj2ACW4aUe-_uFQOjdWCEN-xXoLGhmvRFnL8SNw_TZ5nJe+aw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB5716C131A7D80DAE8CB9E88794FC2@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2025-02-19 09:29:50 +05:30
Tom Lane
b464e51ab3 Update to latest Snowball sources.
It's been some time since we did this, partly because the upstream
snowball project hasn't formally tagged a new release since 2021.
The main motivation for doing it now is to absorb a bug fix
(their commit e322673a841d9abd69994ae8cd20e191090b6ef4), which
prevents a null pointer dereference crash if SN_create_env() gets
a malloc failure at just the wrong point.  We'll patch the back
branches with only that change, but we might as well do the full
sync dance on HEAD.

Aside from a bunch of mostly-minor tweaks to existing stemmers, this
update adds a new stemmer for Estonian.  It also removes the existing
stemmer for Romanian using ISO-8859-2 encoding.  Upstream apparently
concluded that ISO-8859-2 doesn't provide an adequate representation
of some Romanian characters, and the UTF-8 implementation should be
used instead.

While at it, update the README's instructions for doing a sync,
which have not been adjusted during the addition of meson tooling.

Thanks to Maksim Korotkov for discovering the null-pointer
bug and submitting the fix to upstream snowball.

Reported-by: Maksim Korotkov <m.korotkov@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1d1a46-67ab1000-21-80c451@83151435
2025-02-18 21:13:54 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
06dc1ffd24 doc: add example of sign mismatch with POSIX/ISO-8601 time zones
Author: Laurenz Albe

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/eb4d1e15c6822c1937be1491118500dd9201492f.camel@cybertec.at
2025-02-18 15:51:31 -05:00
Amit Kapila
217919dd09 Raise a WARNING for max_slot_wal_keep_size in pg_createsubscriber.
During the pg_createsubscriber execution, it is possible that the required
WAL is removed from the primary/publisher node due to
'max_slot_wal_keep_size'.

This patch raises a WARNING during the '--dry-run' mode if the
'max_slot_wal_keep_size' is set to a non-default value on the
primary/publisher node.

Author: Shubham Khanna <khannashubham1197@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHv8Rj+deqsQXOMa7Tck8CBQUbsua=+4AuMVQ2=MPM0f-ZHbjA@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-18 12:15:43 +05:30
Amit Kapila
164bac92f0 Doc: Improve pg_replication_slots.inactive_since description.
Author: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PssvVMTWVtUPto6HbPO8pgVsvtzndt_FdBomA_Oq4zf3w@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-18 09:23:43 +05:30
Alexander Korotkov
fc069a3a63 Implement Self-Join Elimination
The Self-Join Elimination (SJE) feature removes an inner join of a plain
table to itself in the query tree if it is proven that the join can be
replaced with a scan without impacting the query result.  Self-join and
inner relation get replaced with the outer in query, equivalence classes,
and planner info structures.  Also, the inner restrictlist moves to the
outer one with the removal of duplicated clauses.  Thus, this optimization
reduces the length of the range table list (this especially makes sense for
partitioned relations), reduces the number of restriction clauses and,
in turn, selectivity estimations, and potentially improves total planner
prediction for the query.

This feature is dedicated to avoiding redundancy, which can appear after
pull-up transformations or the creation of an EquivalenceClass-derived clause
like the below.

  SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE x IN (SELECT t3.x FROM t1 t3);
  SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE EXISTS (SELECT t3.x FROM t1 t3 WHERE t3.x = t1.x);
  SELECT * FROM t1,t2, t1 t3 WHERE t1.x = t2.x AND t2.x = t3.x;

In the future, we could also reduce redundancy caused by subquery pull-up
after unnecessary outer join removal in cases like the one below.

  SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE x IN
    (SELECT t3.x FROM t1 t3 LEFT JOIN t2 ON t2.x = t1.x);

Also, it can drastically help to join partitioned tables, removing entries
even before their expansion.

The SJE proof is based on innerrel_is_unique() machinery.

We can remove a self-join when for each outer row:

 1. At most, one inner row matches the join clause;
 2. Each matched inner row must be (physically) the same as the outer one;
 3. Inner and outer rows have the same row mark.

In this patch, we use the next approach to identify a self-join:

 1. Collect all merge-joinable join quals which look like a.x = b.x;
 2. Add to the list above the baseretrictinfo of the inner table;
 3. Check innerrel_is_unique() for the qual list.  If it returns false, skip
    this pair of joining tables;
 4. Check uniqueness, proved by the baserestrictinfo clauses. To prove the
    possibility of self-join elimination, the inner and outer clauses must
    match exactly.

The relation replacement procedure is not trivial and is partly combined
with the one used to remove useless left joins.  Tests covering this feature
were added to join.sql.  Some of the existing regression tests changed due
to self-join removal logic.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/64486b0b-0404-e39e-322d-0801154901f3%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Andrey Lepikhov <a.lepikhov@postgrespro.ru>
Author: Alexander Kuzmenkov <a.kuzmenkov@postgrespro.ru>
Co-authored-by: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Alena Rybakina <lena.ribackina@yandex.ru>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jkatz@postgresql.org>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <david.rowley@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Konstantin Knizhnik <k.knizhnik@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Hywel Carver <hywel@skillerwhale.com>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Ronan Dunklau <ronan.dunklau@aiven.io>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhihong Yu <zyu@yugabyte.com>
Reviewed-by: Greg Stark <stark@mit.edu>
Reviewed-by: Jaime Casanova <jcasanov@systemguards.com.ec>
Reviewed-by: Michał Kłeczek <michal@kleczek.org>
Reviewed-by: Alena Rybakina <lena.ribackina@yandex.ru>
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov <aekorotkov@gmail.com>
2025-02-17 12:44:12 +02:00
Michael Paquier
320545bfcf Add information about WAL buffers being full to EXPLAIN (WAL)
This is similar to ce5bcc4a9f, relying on the addition of
wal_buffers_full to WalUsage.  This time, the information is added to
the output generated by EXPLAIN (WAL).

Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Ilia Evdokimov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z6SOha5YFFgvpwQY@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-17 14:50:33 +09:00
Michael Paquier
ce5bcc4a9f pg_stat_statements: Add wal_buffers_full
wal_buffers_full tracks the number of times WAL buffers become full,
giving hints to be able to tune the GUC wal_buffers.

Up to now, this information was only available in pg_stat_wal.  With
this field available in WalUsage since eaf502747b, exposing it in
pg_stat_statements is straight-forward, and it offers more granularity
at query level.

pg_stat_statements does not need a version bump as one has been done in
commit cf54a2c002 for this development cycle.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Ilia Evdokimov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z6SOha5YFFgvpwQY@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-17 13:55:17 +09:00
Nathan Bossart
7720082ae5 Add delay time to VACUUM/ANALYZE (VERBOSE) and autovacuum logs.
Commit bb8dff9995 added this information to the
pg_stat_progress_vacuum and pg_stat_progress_analyze system views.
This commit adds the same information to the output of VACUUM and
ANALYZE with the VERBOSE option and to the autovacuum logs.

Suggested-by: Masahiro Ikeda <ikedamsh@oss.nttdata.com>
Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZmaXmWDL829fzAVX%40ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-14 14:53:28 -06:00
Daniel Gustafsson
9ad1b3d01f pgcrypto: Add support for CFB mode in AES encryption
Cipher Feedback Mode, CFB, is a self-synchronizing stream cipher which
is very similar to CBC performed in reverse. Since OpenSSL supports it,
we can easily plug it into the existing cipher selection code without
any need for infrastructure changes.

This patch was simultaneously submitted by Umar Hayat and Vladyslav
Nebozhyn, the latter whom suggested the feauture. The committed patch
is Umar's version.

Author: Umar Hayat <postgresql.wizard@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPBGcbxo9ASzq14VTpQp3mnUJ5omdgTWUJOvWV0L6nNigWE5jw@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-14 21:18:37 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
506183bce7 Remove unnecessary (char *) casts [string]
Remove (char *) casts around string functions where the arguments or
result already have the right type and the cast is useless (or worse,
potentially casts away a qualifier, but this doesn't appear to be the
case here).

Reviewed-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/fd1fcedb-3492-4fc8-9e3e-74b97f2db6c7%40eisentraut.org
2025-02-12 08:49:18 +01:00
John Naylor
0bc34ad692 Doc: Fix punctuation errors
Author: 斉藤登 <noborusai@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAM3qnL6i-BSu5rB2+KiHLjMCOXiQEiPMBvEj7F1CgUzZMooLA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-02-12 13:18:14 +07:00
Nathan Bossart
bb8dff9995 Add cost-based vacuum delay time to progress views.
This commit adds the amount of time spent sleeping due to
cost-based delay to the pg_stat_progress_vacuum and
pg_stat_progress_analyze system views.  A new configuration
parameter named track_cost_delay_timing, which is off by default,
controls whether this information is gathered.  For vacuum, the
reported value includes the sleep time of any associated parallel
workers.  However, parallel workers only report their sleep time
once per second to avoid overloading the leader process.

Bumps catversion.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot <bertranddrouvot.pg@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiro Ikeda <ikedamsh@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar <dilipbalaut@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZmaXmWDL829fzAVX%40ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2025-02-11 16:38:14 -06:00
Melanie Plageman
d0d649e916 Limit pgbench COPY FREEZE to ordinary relations
pgbench client-side data generation uses COPY FREEZE to load data for most
tables. COPY FREEZE isn't supported for partitioned tables and since pgbench
only supports partitioning pgbench_accounts, pgbench used a hard-coded check to
skip COPY FREEZE and use plain COPY for a partitioned pgbench_accounts.

If the user has manually partitioned one of the other pgbench tables, this
causes client-side data generation to error out with:

ERROR:  cannot perform COPY FREEZE on a partitioned table

Fix this by limiting COPY FREEZE to ordinary tables (RELKIND_RELATION).

Author: Sergey Tatarintsev <s.tatarintsev@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/97f55fca-8a7b-4da8-b413-7d1c57010676%40postgrespro.ru
2025-02-11 16:52:08 -05:00
Melanie Plageman
052026c9b9 Eagerly scan all-visible pages to amortize aggressive vacuum
Aggressive vacuums must scan every unfrozen tuple in order to advance
the relfrozenxid/relminmxid. Because data is often vacuumed before it is
old enough to require freezing, relations may build up a large backlog
of pages that are set all-visible but not all-frozen in the visibility
map. When an aggressive vacuum is triggered, all of these pages must be
scanned. These pages have often been evicted from shared buffers and
even from the kernel buffer cache. Thus, aggressive vacuums often incur
large amounts of extra I/O at the expense of foreground workloads.

To amortize the cost of aggressive vacuums, eagerly scan some
all-visible but not all-frozen pages during normal vacuums.

All-visible pages that are eagerly scanned and set all-frozen in the
visibility map are counted as successful eager freezes and those not
frozen are counted as failed eager freezes.

If too many eager scans fail in a row, eager scanning is temporarily
suspended until a later portion of the relation. The number of failures
tolerated is configurable globally and per table.

To effectively amortize aggressive vacuums, we cap the number of
successes as well. Capping eager freeze successes also limits the amount
of potentially wasted work if these pages are modified again before the
next aggressive vacuum. Once we reach the maximum number of blocks
successfully eager frozen, eager scanning is disabled for the remainder
of the vacuum of the relation.

Original design idea from Robert Haas, with enhancements from
Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra, and me

Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Reviewed-by: Bilal Yavuz <byavuz81@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_ZF_KCzZuOrPrOqjGVe8iRVWEAJSpzMgRQs%3D5-v84cXUg%40mail.gmail.com
2025-02-11 13:53:48 -05:00
Andres Freund
4dd09a1d41 config: Rename "Asynchronous Behavior" to "I/O"
"I/O" seems more descriptive than "Asynchronous Behavior", given that some of
the GUCs in the section don't relate to anything asynchronous.

Most other abbreviations in the config sections are un-abbreviated, but
"Input/Output" seems less likely to be helpful than just IO or I/O.

Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/x3tlw2jk5gm3r3mv47hwrshffyw7halpczkfbk3peksxds7bvc@lguk43z3bsyq
2025-02-11 12:53:40 -05:00
Andres Freund
740766d37c config: Split "Worker Processes" out of "Asynchronous Behavior"
Having all the worker related GUCs in the same section as IO controlling GUCs
doesn't really make sense. Create a separate section for them.

Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/x3tlw2jk5gm3r3mv47hwrshffyw7halpczkfbk3peksxds7bvc@lguk43z3bsyq
2025-02-11 12:53:40 -05:00
Andres Freund
32c34006b2 docs: EUC_TW can be up to four bytes wide, not three
Backpatch-through: 13
Security: CVE-2025-1094
2025-02-10 10:03:37 -05:00
Tom Lane
ecb8226af6 PDF docs build: avoid spurious "warn" in build logs.
Improve on e4c886519 so that the string "warn" appears in
the output when there's a problem, and not when there isn't.
This should silence noise I've been seeing in my buildfarm
warning scraper.
2025-02-07 22:12:38 -05:00
Tom Lane
11bba6e494 Doc: clarify behavior of timestamptz input some more.
Try to make it absolutely plain that we don't retain the
originally specified time zone, only the UTC timestamp.

While at it, make glossary entries for "UTC" and "GMT".

Author: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Co-authored-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173796426022.1064.9135167366862649513@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-02-07 12:40:41 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
83ea6c5402 Virtual generated columns
This adds a new variant of generated columns that are computed on read
(like a view, unlike the existing stored generated columns, which are
computed on write, like a materialized view).

The syntax for the column definition is

    ... GENERATED ALWAYS AS (...) VIRTUAL

and VIRTUAL is also optional.  VIRTUAL is the default rather than
STORED to match various other SQL products.  (The SQL standard makes
no specification about this, but it also doesn't know about VIRTUAL or
STORED.)  (Also, virtual views are the default, rather than
materialized views.)

Virtual generated columns are stored in tuples as null values.  (A
very early version of this patch had the ambition to not store them at
all.  But so much stuff breaks or gets confused if you have tuples
where a column in the middle is completely missing.  This is a
compromise, and it still saves space over being forced to use stored
generated columns.  If we ever find a way to improve this, a bit of
pg_upgrade cleverness could allow for upgrades to a newer scheme.)

The capabilities and restrictions of virtual generated columns are
mostly the same as for stored generated columns.  In some cases, this
patch keeps virtual generated columns more restricted than they might
technically need to be, to keep the two kinds consistent.  Some of
that could maybe be relaxed later after separate careful
considerations.

Some functionality that is currently not supported, but could possibly
be added as incremental features, some easier than others:

- index on or using a virtual column
- hence also no unique constraints on virtual columns
- extended statistics on virtual columns
- foreign-key constraints on virtual columns
- not-null constraints on virtual columns (check constraints are supported)
- ALTER TABLE / DROP EXPRESSION
- virtual column cannot have domain type
- virtual columns are not supported in logical replication

The tests in generated_virtual.sql have been copied over from
generated_stored.sql with the keyword replaced.  This way we can make
sure the behavior is mostly aligned, and the differences can be
visible.  Some tests for currently not supported features are
currently commented out.

Reviewed-by: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Tested-by: Shlok Kyal <shlok.kyal.oss@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/a368248e-69e4-40be-9c07-6c3b5880b0a6@eisentraut.org
2025-02-07 09:46:59 +01:00
Nathan Bossart
401a6956fa Disallow COPY FREEZE on foreign tables.
This didn't actually work: the COPY succeeds, but the FREEZE
optimization isn't applied.  There doesn't seem to be an easy way
to support FREEZE on foreign tables, so let's follow the precedent
established by commit 5c9a5513a3 by raising an error early.  This
is arguably a bug fix, but due to the lack of reports, the minimal
discussion on the mailing list, and the potential to break existing
scripts, I am not back-patching it for now.

Author: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Zhang Mingli <zmlpostgres@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA5RZ0ujeNgKpE3OrLtR%3DeJGa5LkGMekFzQTwjgw%3DrzaLufQLQ%40mail.gmail.com
2025-02-06 15:23:40 -06:00
Nathan Bossart
306dc520b9 Introduce autovacuum_vacuum_max_threshold.
One way autovacuum chooses tables to vacuum is by comparing the
number of updated or deleted tuples with a value calculated using
autovacuum_vacuum_threshold and autovacuum_vacuum_scale_factor.
The threshold specifies the base value for comparison, and the
scale factor specifies the fraction of the table size to add to it.
This strategy ensures that smaller tables are vacuumed after fewer
updates/deletes than larger tables, which is reasonable in many
cases but can result in infrequent vacuums on very large tables.
This is undesirable for a couple of reasons, such as very large
tables incurring a huge amount of bloat between vacuums.

This new parameter provides a way to set a limit on the value
calculated with autovacuum_vacuum_threshold and
autovacuum_vacuum_scale_factor so that very large tables are
vacuumed more frequently.  By default, it is set to 100,000,000
tuples, but it can be disabled by setting it to -1.  It can also be
adjusted for individual tables by changing storage parameters.

Author: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Frédéric Yhuel <frederic.yhuel@dalibo.com>
Reviewed-by: Melanie Plageman <melanieplageman@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas <robertmhaas@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck <mbanck@gmx.net>
Reviewed-by: Joe Conway <mail@joeconway.com>
Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih <samimseih@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: wenhui qiu <qiuwenhuifx@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vinícius Abrahão <vinnix.bsd@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Reviewed-by: Alena Rybakina <a.rybakina@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/956435f8-3b2f-47a6-8756-8c54ded61802%40dalibo.com
2025-02-05 15:48:18 -06:00
Daniel Gustafsson
ee4667f018 doc: Update links which returned 404
Two links in the isn module documentation were pointing to tools
which had been moved, resulting in 404 error responses.  Update
to the new URLs for the tools.  The link to the Sequoia 2000 page
in the history section was no longer working, and since the page
is no longer available online update our link to point at the
paper instead which is on a stable URL.

These links exist in all versions of the documentation so backpatch
to all supported branches.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reported-by: charukiewicz@protonmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173679670185.705.8565555804465055355@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-02-05 13:58:40 +01:00
Amit Kapila
0ec3c295e7 Avoid updating inactive_since for invalid replication slots.
It is possible for the inactive_since value of an invalid replication slot
to be updated multiple times, which is unexpected behavior like during the
release of the slot or at the time of restart. This is harmless because
invalid slots are not allowed to be accessed but it is not prudent to
update invalid slots. We are planning to invalidate slots due to other
reasons like idle time and it will look odd that the slot's inactive_since
displays the recent time in this field after invalidated due to idle time.
So, this patch ensures that the inactive_since field of slots is not
updated for invalid slots.

In the passing, ensure to use the same inactive_since time for all the
slots at restart while restoring them from the disk.

Author: Nisha Moond <nisha.moond412@gmail.com>
Author: Bharath Rupireddy <bharath.rupireddyforpostgres@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Hou Zhijie <houzj.fnst@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABdArM7QdifQ_MHmMA=Cc4v8+MeckkwKncm2Nn6tX9wSCQ-+iw@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-05 08:56:14 +05:30
Michael Paquier
a051e71e28 Add data for WAL in pg_stat_io and backend statistics
This commit adds WAL IO stats to both pg_stat_io view and per-backend IO
statistics (pg_stat_get_backend_io()).  This change is possible since
f92c854cf4, as WAL IO is not counted in blocks in some code paths
where its stats data is measured (like WAL read in xlogreader.c).

IOContext gains IOCONTEXT_INIT and IOObject IOOBJECT_WAL, with the
following combinations allowed:
- IOOBJECT_WAL/IOCONTEXT_NORMAL is used to track I/O operations done on
already-created WAL segments.
- IOOBJECT_WAL/IOCONTEXT_INIT is used for tracking I/O operations done
when initializing WAL segments.

The core changes are done in pg_stat_io.c, backend statistics inherit
them.  Backend statistics and pg_stat_io are now available for the WAL
writer, the WAL receiver and the WAL summarizer processes.

I/O timing data is controlled by the GUC track_io_timing, like the
existing data of pg_stat_io for consistency.  The timings related to
IOOBJECT_WAL show up if the GUC is enabled (disabled by default).

Bump pgstats file version, due to the additions in IOObject and
IOContext, impacting the amount of data written for the fixed-numbered
IO stats kind in the pgstats file.

Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Nitin Jadhav, Amit Kapila, Michael
Paquier, Melanie Plageman, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ3AiQ+ZMxUuXnBpd0Rrh1YhwJ5FudkHg=JU0P+-W8T4Vg@mail.gmail.com
2025-02-04 16:50:00 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
c09e5a6a01 Convert strategies to and from compare types
For each Index AM, provide a mapping between operator strategies and
the system-wide generic concept of a comparison type.  For example,
for btree, BTLessStrategyNumber maps to and from COMPARE_LT.  Numerous
places in the planner and executor think directly in terms of btree
strategy numbers (and a few in terms of hash strategy numbers.)  These
should be converted over subsequent commits to think in terms of
CompareType instead.  (This commit doesn't make any use of this API
yet.)

Author: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E72EAA49-354D-4C2E-8EB9-255197F55330@enterprisedb.com
2025-02-02 10:26:04 +01:00
Daniel Gustafsson
59d6c03956 doc: Fix pg_buffercache_evict() title
Use <function> rather than <structname> in the <title> to be consistent
with how other functions in this module are documented. Also suffix the
function name with () for consistency.

Backpatch to v17 where pg_buffercache_evict was introduced.

Author: Ashutosh Bapat <ashutosh.bapat.oss@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAExHW5uKWH8CuZc9NCb8XxSQc6uzvACV0cScebm54kF763ERAw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 17
2025-01-31 10:44:21 +01:00
Amit Kapila
6252b1eaf8 Doc: Generated column replication.
Commit 7054186c4e added the support to publish generated stored columns.
This patch adds detailed documentation for that feature.

Author: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B80D17B2-2C8E-4C7D-87F2-E5B4BE3C069E%40gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PsYmAvKhUjA1AaR1rxLdeSBKiBko8wKyf4_H8nEEqDuOg@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-30 11:09:18 +05:30
Amit Kapila
75eb9766ec Rename pubgencols_type to pubgencols in pg_publication.
The column added in commit e65dbc9927, pubgencols_type, was inconsistent
with the naming conventions of other columns in the pg_publication
catalog.

Author: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm1u-ufVOW-RUsXSooqzkpohxfZYy=z78fbcr_9Pq5hbCg@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-28 10:42:46 +05:30
Michael Paquier
30a6ed0ce4 Track per-relation cumulative time spent in [auto]vacuum and [auto]analyze
This commit adds four fields to the statistics of relations, aggregating
the amount of time spent for each operation on a relation:
- total_vacuum_time, for manual vacuum.
- total_autovacuum_time, for vacuum done by the autovacuum daemon.
- total_analyze_time, for manual analyze.
- total_autoanalyze_time, for analyze done by the autovacuum daemon.

This gives users the option to derive the average time spent for these
operations with the help of the related "count" fields.

Bump catalog version (for the catalog changes) and PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID
(for the additions in PgStat_StatTabEntry).

Author: Sami Imseih
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA5RZ0uVOGBYmPEeGF2d1B_67tgNjKx_bKDuL+oUftuoz+=Y1g@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-28 09:57:32 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
5afaba6297 doc: Meson is not experimental on Windows
The installation documentation stated that using Meson is
experimental.  But since this is the only way to build using Visual
Studio on Windows, this would imply that that whole build procedure is
experimental, which isn't true.  So qualify this statement a bit more.
We keep the statement that Meson is experimental on other platforms,
since it doesn't have full, confirmed feature parity with the make
build system.

Author: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/a3e76618-4cb5-4d54-a71c-da4fb8ba571b@eisentraut.org
2025-01-27 12:02:00 +01:00
Tom Lane
d83a108c10 Doc: recommend "psql -X" for restoring pg_dump scripts.
This practice avoids possible problems caused by non-default psql
options, such as disabling AUTOCOMMIT.

Author: Shinya Kato <Shinya11.Kato@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/96ff23a5d858ff72ca8e823a014d16fe@oss.nttdata.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-01-25 12:42:22 -05:00
Jeff Davis
d2ca16bb50 Fix PDF doc build.
Reported-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/608525.1737781222@sss.pgh.pa.us
2025-01-25 00:12:30 -08:00
Jeff Davis
bfc5992069 Add SQL function CASEFOLD().
Useful for caseless matching. Similar to LOWER(), but avoids edge-case
problems with using LOWER() for caseless matching.

For collations that support it, CASEFOLD() handles characters with
more than two case variations or multi-character case variations. Some
characters may fold to uppercase. The results of case folding are also
more stable across Unicode versions than LOWER() or UPPER().

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a1886ddfcd8f60cb3e905c93009b646b4cfb74c5.camel%40j-davis.com
Reviewed-by: Ian Lawrence Barwick
2025-01-24 14:56:22 -08:00
Daniel Gustafsson
035f99cbeb pgcrypto: Make it possible to disable built-in crypto
When using OpenSSL and/or the underlying operating system in FIPS
mode no non-FIPS certified crypto implementations should be used.
While that is already possible by just not invoking the built-in
crypto in pgcrypto, this adds a GUC which prohibit the code from
being called.  This doesn't change the FIPS status of PostgreSQL
but can make it easier for sites which target FIPS compliance to
ensure that violations cannot occur.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Author: Joe Conway <mail@joeconway.com>
Reviewed-by: Joe Conway <mail@joeconway.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16b4a157-9ea1-44d0-b7b3-4c85df5de97b@joeconway.com
2025-01-24 14:25:08 +01:00
Daniel Gustafsson
924d89a354 pgcrypto: Add function to check FIPS mode
This adds a SQL callable function for reading and returning the status
of FIPS configuration of OpenSSL.  If OpenSSL is operating with FIPS
enabled it will return true, otherwise false.  As this adds a function
to the SQL file, bump the extension version to 1.4.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Joe Conway <mail@joeconway.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8f979145-e206-475a-a31b-73c977a4134c@joeconway.com
2025-01-24 14:18:40 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
aeb8ea361a Convert sepgsql tests to TAP
Add a TAP test for sepgsql.  This automates the previously required
manual setup before the test.  The actual tests are still run by
pg_regress, as before, but now called from within the TAP Perl script.

The previous manual test script (test_sepgsql) is left in place, since
its purpose is (also) to test whether a running instance was properly
initialized for sepgsql.  But it has been changed to call pg_regress
directly and no longer require make.

Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson <andreas@proxel.se>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/651a5baf-5c45-4a5a-a202-0c8453a4ebf8@eisentraut.org
2025-01-24 12:39:47 +01:00
Amit Kapila
6fc4fc42da Doc: Fix a typo introduced in 4a0e7314f1.
Author: Erik Rijkers <er@xs4all.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6e625c81-968e-42d0-802d-edfaf9cfac11@xs4all.nl
2025-01-24 08:25:21 +05:30
Amit Kapila
117f9f328e Doc: Fix column name in pg_publication catalog.
Commit e65dbc9927 incorrectly spelled the column name in the
pg_publication catalog. In passing make the order of columns in the doc
match the actual catalog.

Author: Shinoda, Noriyoshi <noriyoshi.shinoda@hpe.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DM4PR84MB1734F8F140E4477580761F93EEE02@DM4PR84MB1734.NAMPRD84.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
2025-01-24 08:11:29 +05:30
Tom Lane
01463e1ccc Ensure that AFTER triggers run as the instigating user.
With deferred triggers, it is possible that the current role changes
between the time when the trigger is queued and the time it is
executed (for example, the triggering data modification could have
been executed in a SECURITY DEFINER function).

Up to now, deferred trigger functions would run with the current role
set to whatever was active at commit time.  That does not matter for
foreign-key constraints, whose correctness doesn't depend on the
current role.  But for user-written triggers, the current role
certainly can matter.

Hence, fix things so that AFTER triggers are fired under the role
that was active when they were queued, matching the behavior of
BEFORE triggers which would have actually fired at that time.
(If the trigger function is marked SECURITY DEFINER, that of course
overrides this, as it always has.)

This does not create any new security exposure: if you do DML on a
table owned by a hostile user, that user has always had various ways
to exploit your permissions, such as the aforementioned BEFORE
triggers, default expressions, etc.  It might remove some security
exposure, because the old behavior could potentially expose some
other role besides the one directly modifying the table.

There was discussion of making a larger change, such as running as
the trigger's owner.  However, that would break the common idiom of
capturing the value of CURRENT_USER in a trigger for auditing/logging
purposes.  This change will make no difference in the typical scenario
where the current role doesn't change before commit.

Arguably this is a bug fix, but it seems too big a semantic change
to consider for back-patching.

Author: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Reviewed-by: Joseph Koshakow <koshy44@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/77ee784cf248e842f74588418f55c2931e47bd78.camel@cybertec.at
2025-01-23 12:25:55 -05:00
Álvaro Herrera
b663b9436e
Allow NOT VALID foreign key constraints on partitioned tables
This feature was intentionally omitted when FKs were first implemented
for partitioned tables, and had been requested a few times; the
usefulness is clear.

Validation can happen for each partition individually, which is useful
to contain the number of locks held and the duration; or it can be
executed for the partitioning hierarchy as a single command, which
validates all child constraints that haven't been validated already.

This is also useful to implement NOT ENFORCED constraints on top.

Author: Amul Sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAJ_b96Bp=-ZwihPPtuaNX=SrZ0U6ZsXD3+fgARO0JuKa8v2jQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-23 15:54:38 +01:00
Amit Kapila
e65dbc9927 Change publication's publish_generated_columns option type to enum.
The current boolean publish_generated_columns option only supports a
binary choice, which is insufficient for future enhancements where
generated columns can be of different types (e.g., stored or virtual). The
supported values for the publish_generated_columns option are 'none' and
'stored'.

Author: Vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith <smithpb2250@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila <amit.kapila16@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d718d219-dd47-4a33-bb97-56e8fc4da994@eisentraut.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B80D17B2-2C8E-4C7D-87F2-E5B4BE3C069E@gmail.com
2025-01-23 15:28:37 +05:30
Tom Lane
172e6b3adb Support RN (roman-numeral format) in to_number().
We've long had roman-numeral output support in to_char(),
but lacked the reverse conversion.  Here it is.

Author: Hunaid Sohail <hunaidpgml@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Maciek Sakrejda <m.sakrejda@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas@vondra.me>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMWA6ybh4M1VQqpmnu2tfSwO+3gAPeA8YKnMHVADeB=XDEvT_A@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-22 15:18:50 -05:00
Amit Kapila
4a0e7314f1 Doc: Update the interaction of tablesync with wal_retrieve_retry_interval.
In passing, update the documentation that explains the process of initial
data replication to explicitly state that it uses a table synchronization
worker.

Author: Vignesh C
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Shlok Kyal, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm3RxGcD4cDAV5Q0_A4n06F3+AAMpxiyND9Zn0dB86hFmg@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-22 10:54:53 +05:30
Tom Lane
4907ba304c Doc: simplify the tutorial's window-function examples.
For the purposes of this discussion, row_number() is just as good
as rank(), and its behavior is easier to understand and describe.
So let's switch the examples to using row_number().

Along the way to checking the results given in the tutorial,
I found it helpful to extract the empsalary table we use in the
regression tests, which is evidently the same data that was used
to make these results.  So I shoved that into advanced.source
to improve the coverage of that file a little.  (There's still
several pages of the tutorial that are not included in it,
but at least now 3.5 Window Functions is covered.)

Suggested-by: "David G. Johnston" <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Author: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173737973383.1070.1832752929070067441@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2025-01-21 14:43:21 -05:00
Jeff Davis
d3d0983169 Support PG_UNICODE_FAST locale in the builtin collation provider.
The PG_UNICODE_FAST locale uses code point sort order (fast,
memcmp-based) combined with Unicode character semantics. The character
semantics are based on Unicode full case mapping.

Full case mapping can map a single codepoint to multiple codepoints,
such as "ß" uppercasing to "SS". Additionally, it handles
context-sensitive mappings like the "final sigma", and it uses
titlecase mappings such as "Dž" when titlecasing (rather than plain
uppercase mappings).

Importantly, the uppercasing of "ß" as "SS" is specifically mentioned
by the SQL standard. In Postgres, UCS_BASIC uses plain ASCII semantics
for case mapping and pattern matching, so if we changed it to use the
PG_UNICODE_FAST locale, it would offer better compliance with the
standard. For now, though, do not change the behavior of UCS_BASIC.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ddfd67928818f138f51635712529bc5e1d25e4e7.camel@j-davis.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/27bb0e52-801d-4f73-a0a4-02cfdd4a9ada@eisentraut.org
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Daniel Verite
2025-01-17 15:56:30 -08:00
Tom Lane
86e4efc52b Add documentation about calling version-1 C functions from C.
This topic wasn't really covered before, so fill in some details.

Author: Florents Tselai <florents.tselai@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/90853055-5BBD-493D-91E5-721677C7C59B@gmail.com
2025-01-17 14:37:38 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
0869ea43e9 Remove flex version checks
Remove the flex version checks from configure and meson.  The cutoff
versions are all so ancient that this is no longer relevant, and what
the actual cutoff should be is a bit fuzzy.

This also removes the ancient behavior that configure would also
accept a "lex" program if it is actuall flex.  This aligns the check
with meson in this respect.

For future reference, as of this commit, these are relevant flex
versions:

- The hard required minimum is flex 2.5.34 as of commit b1ef48980d,
  but this has not actually been tested.

- Prior to this, the minimum enforced by configure/meson was flex
  2.5.35, which is the oldest present in the buildfarm right now.

- As of commit 6fdd5d9563, the oldest version that will compile
  without warnings due to flex-generated code is flex 2.5.36.

- The oldest version that probably still has some practical relevance
  is flex 2.5.37, which ships with CentOS/RHEL 7.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/1a204ccd-7ae6-478c-a431-407b5c48ccc6@eisentraut.org
2025-01-17 09:30:42 +01:00
Tom Lane
d7674c9fab Seek zone abbreviations in the IANA data before timezone_abbreviations.
If a time zone abbreviation used in datetime input is defined in
the currently active timezone, use that definition in preference
to looking in the timezone_abbreviations list.  That allows us to
correctly handle abbreviations that have different meanings in
different timezones.  Also, it eliminates an inconsistency between
datetime input and datetime output: the non-ISO datestyles for
timestamptz have always printed abbreviations taken from the IANA
data, not from timezone_abbreviations.  Before this fix, it was
possible to demonstrate cases where casting a timestamp to text
and back fails or changes the value significantly because of that
inconsistency.

While this change removes the ability to override the IANA data about
an abbreviation known in the current zone, it's not clear that there's
any real use-case for doing so.  But it is clear that this makes life
a lot easier for dealing with abbreviations that have conflicts across
different time zones.

Also update the pg_timezone_abbrevs view to report abbreviations
that are recognized via the IANA data, and *not* report any
timezone_abbreviations entries that are thereby overridden.
Under the hood, there are now two SRFs, one that pulls the IANA
data and one that pulls timezone_abbreviations entries.  They're
combined by logic in the view.  This approach was useful for
debugging (since the functions can be called on their own).
While I don't intend to document the functions explicitly,
they might be useful to call directly.

Also improve DecodeTimezoneAbbrev's caching logic so that it can
cache zone abbreviations found in the IANA data.  Without that,
this patch would have caused a noticeable degradation of the
runtime of timestamptz_in.

Per report from Aleksander Alekseev and additional investigation.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TOATjJqvhnYsui0=CO5XFMF4dvTGH+skzB--jNhqSQu5g@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-16 14:11:19 -05:00
Dean Rasheed
80feb727c8 Add OLD/NEW support to RETURNING in DML queries.
This allows the RETURNING list of INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE/MERGE queries
to explicitly return old and new values by using the special aliases
"old" and "new", which are automatically added to the query (if not
already defined) while parsing its RETURNING list, allowing things
like:

  RETURNING old.colname, new.colname, ...

  RETURNING old.*, new.*

Additionally, a new syntax is supported, allowing the names "old" and
"new" to be changed to user-supplied alias names, e.g.:

  RETURNING WITH (OLD AS o, NEW AS n) o.colname, n.colname, ...

This is useful when the names "old" and "new" are already defined,
such as inside trigger functions, allowing backwards compatibility to
be maintained -- the interpretation of any existing queries that
happen to already refer to relations called "old" or "new", or use
those as aliases for other relations, is not changed.

For an INSERT, old values will generally be NULL, and for a DELETE,
new values will generally be NULL, but that may change for an INSERT
with an ON CONFLICT ... DO UPDATE clause, or if a query rewrite rule
changes the command type. Therefore, we put no restrictions on the use
of old and new in any DML queries.

Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Jian He and Jeff Davis.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCWx0J0-v=Qjc6gXzR=KtsdvAE7Ow=D=mu50AgOe+pvisQ@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-16 14:57:35 +00:00
Amit Kapila
965b2cc0a4 Doc: Improve the Replica Identity information.
This commit improves the Replica Identity information and clarifies its
related restrictions.

Reported-by: James Coleman
Author: Peter Smith
Co-authored-by: Robert Treat
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAaqYe_=7qFSqW7qavvhVy58mmzk1uSQ0RReRiUHyKO5znvr7g@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-16 08:53:39 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
761c79508e postgres_fdw: SCRAM authentication pass-through
This enables SCRAM authentication for postgres_fdw when connecting to
a foreign server without having to store a plain-text password on user
mapping options.

This is done by saving the SCRAM ClientKey and ServeryKey from the
client authentication and using those instead of the plain-text
password for the server-side SCRAM exchange.  The new foreign-server
or user-mapping option "use_scram_passthrough" enables this.

Co-authored-by: Matheus Alcantara <mths.dev@pm.me>
Co-authored-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/27b29a35-9b96-46a9-bc1a-914140869dac@gmail.com
2025-01-15 17:58:05 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
630f9a43ce Change gist stratnum function to use CompareType
This changes commit 7406ab623f in that the gist strategy number
mapping support function is changed to use the CompareType enum as
input, instead of the "well-known" RT*StrategyNumber strategy numbers.

This is a bit cleaner, since you are not dealing with two sets of
strategy numbers.  Also, this will enable us to subsume this system
into a more general system of using CompareType to define operator
semantics across index methods.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E72EAA49-354D-4C2E-8EB9-255197F55330@enterprisedb.com
2025-01-15 11:34:04 +01:00
Dean Rasheed
00f4c2959d psql: Add option to use expanded mode to all list commands.
This allows "x" to be appended to any psql list-like meta-command,
forcing its output to be displayed in expanded mode. This improves
readability in cases where the output is very wide. For example,
"\dfx+" (or equivalently "\df+x") will produce a list of functions,
with additional details, in expanded mode.

This works with all \d* meta-commands, plus \l, \z, and \lo_list, with
the one exception that the expanded mode option "x" cannot be appended
to "\d" by itself, since "\dx" already means something else.

Dean Rasheed, reviewed by Greg Sabino Mullane.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCVXJk3KsmCncf7PAVbxdDAUDm3QzDgGT7mBYySWikuOYw@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-14 16:29:15 +00:00
Dean Rasheed
4cb560b53f Consistently spell "leakproof" without a hyphen.
The overwhelming majority of places already did this, but a small
handful of places had a hyphen.

Yugo Nagata.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCXnnuORE2BoGwHw2zbtVvsPOLhbfVmEk9GxRzK%2Bx3OW-Q%40mail.gmail.com
2025-01-14 13:50:54 +00:00
Dean Rasheed
2355e51110 psql: Add leakproof indicator to \df+, \do+, \dAo+, and \dC+ output.
This allows users to determine whether particular functions are
leakproof, and whether the underlying functions used by operators and
casts are leakproof. This is useful to determine whether indexes can
be used in queries on security barrier views or tables with row-level
security policies.

Yugo Nagata, reviewed by Erik Wienhold and Dean Rasheed.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240701220817.483f9b645b95611f8b1f65da%40sranhm.sraoss.co.jp
2025-01-14 13:23:24 +00:00
Michael Paquier
f92c854cf4 Make pg_stat_io count IOs as bytes instead of blocks for some operations
Currently in pg_stat_io view, IOs are counted as blocks of size
BLCKSZ.  There are two limitations with this design:
* The actual number of I/O requests sent to the kernel is lower because
I/O requests may be merged before being sent.  Additionally, it gives
the impression that all I/Os are done in block size, which shadows the
benefits of merging I/O requests.
* Some patches are under work to extend pg_stat_io for the tracking of
operations that may not be linked to the block size.  For example, WAL
read IOs are done in variable bytes and it is not possible to correctly
show these IOs in pg_stat_io view, and we want to keep all this data in
a single system view rather than spread it across multiple relations to
ease monitoring.

WaitReadBuffers() can now be tracked as a single read operation
worth N blocks.  Same for ExtendBufferedRelShared() and
ExtendBufferedRelLocal() for extensions.

Three columns are added to pg_stat_io for reads, writes and extensions
for the byte calculations.  op_bytes, which was always hardcoded to
BLCKSZ, is removed.  IO backend statistics are updated to reflect these
changes.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuz
Reviewed-by: Bertrand Drouvot, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN55FZ0oqxBaaHAEsj=xFqkzE3n5P=3RA1V_igXwL-RV7QRzyw@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-14 12:14:29 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
ca87c415e2 Add support for NOT ENFORCED in CHECK constraints
This adds support for the NOT ENFORCED/ENFORCED flag for constraints,
with support for check constraints.

The plan is to eventually support this for foreign key constraints,
where it is typically more useful.

Note that CHECK constraints do not currently support ALTER operations,
so changing the enforceability of an existing constraint isn't
possible without dropping and recreating it.  This could be added
later.

Author: Amul Sul <amul.sul@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Tested-by: Triveni N <triveni.n@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAJ_b962c5AcYW9KUt_R_ER5qs3fUGbe4az-SP-vuwPS-w-AGA@mail.gmail.com
2025-01-11 10:52:30 +01:00
Melanie Plageman
ca9c6a5680 Consolidate docs for vacuum-related GUCs in new subsection
GUCs related to vacuum's freezing behavior were documented in a
subsection of the Client Connection Defaults documentation. These GUCs
don't belong there, as they affect the freezing behavior of all vacuums
-- including autovacuums.

There wasn't a clear alternative location, so this commit makes a new
"Server Configuration" docs subsection, "Vacuuming", with a subsection
for "Freezing". It also moves the "Automatic Vacuuming" subsection and
the docs on GUCs controlling cost-based vacuum delay under the new
"Vacuuming" subsection.

The other vacuum-related GUCs under the "Resource Consumption"
subsection have been left in their current location, as they seem to fit
there.

The GUCs' documentation was largely lifted and shifted. The only
modification made was the addition of a few missing <literal> tags.

Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/CAAKRu_aQUOaMYrcjNuXeSkJtaX9oRUzKP57bsYbC0gVVWS%2BcbA%40mail.gmail.com
2025-01-10 18:22:19 -05:00
Tom Lane
bebe904038 Use @extschema:name@ notation in contrib transform modules.
Harden hstore_plperl, hstore_plpython, and ltree_plpython
against search-path-based attacks by using @extschema:name@
notation to refer to the underlying hstore or ltree data type.

This allows removal of the previous documentation warning
suggesting that they must be installed in the same schema as
the underlying data type.  In passing, also improve a para in
extend.sgml to suggest using @extschema:name@ for such purposes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/692480.1736021695@sss.pgh.pa.us
2025-01-09 15:16:56 -05:00
Fujii Masao
6313a76b35 doc: Clarify synchronous_standby_names parameter.
The synchronous_standby_names GUC allows specifying num_sync,
the number of synchronous standbys transactions must wait for
replies from. This value must be an integer greater than zero.
This commit updates the documentation to clarify this requirement.

Reported-by: Asphator <asphator@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18663-b02f75cb919f1b60@postgresql.org
2025-01-09 21:04:49 +09:00
Nathan Bossart
f7e1b3828a Add passwordcheck.min_password_length.
This new parameter can be used to change the minimum allowed
password length (in bytes).  Note that it has no effect if a user
supplies a pre-encrypted password.

Author: Emanuele Musella, Maurizio Boriani
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Bertrand Drouvot, Japin Li
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BugDNyYtHOtWCqVD3YkSVYDWD_1fO8Jm_ahsDGA5dXhbDPwrQ%40mail.gmail.com
2025-01-07 15:06:40 -06:00
Nathan Bossart
6d01541960 Lower default value of autovacuum_worker_slots in initdb as needed.
Commit c758119e5b increased the default number of semaphores
required for autovacuum workers from 3 to 16.  Unfortunately, some
systems have very low default settings for SEMMNS, and this change
moved the minimum required for Postgres well beyond that limit (see
commit 38da053463 for more details).

With this commit, initdb will lower the default value for
autovacuum_worker_slots as needed, just like it already does for
parameters such as max_connections and shared_buffers.  We test
for (max_connections / 6) slots, which conveniently has the
following properties:

* For the initial max_connections default of 100, the default of
  autovacuum_worker_slots will be 16, which is its initial default
  value specified in the documentation and in guc_tables.c.

* For the lowest possible max_connections default of 25, the
  default of autovacuum_worker_slots will be 4, which means we only
  need one additional semaphore for autovacuum workers (as compared
  to before commit c758119e5b).  This leaves some wiggle room for
  new auxiliary workers, etc. on systems with low SEMMNS, and it
  ensures that the default number of slots will be greater than or
  equal to the default value of autovacuum_max_workers (3).

Reported-by: Tom Lane
Suggested-by: Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1346002.1736198977%40sss.pgh.pa.us
2025-01-07 14:38:55 -06:00
Nathan Bossart
c758119e5b Allow changing autovacuum_max_workers without restarting.
This commit introduces a new parameter named
autovacuum_worker_slots that controls how many autovacuum worker
slots to reserve during server startup.  Modifying this new
parameter's value does require a server restart, but it should
typically be set to the upper bound of what you might realistically
need to set autovacuum_max_workers.  With that new parameter in
place, autovacuum_max_workers can now be changed with a SIGHUP
(e.g., pg_ctl reload).

If autovacuum_max_workers is set higher than
autovacuum_worker_slots, a WARNING is emitted, and the server will
only start up to autovacuum_worker_slots workers at a given time.
If autovacuum_max_workers is set to a value less than the number of
currently-running autovacuum workers, the existing workers will
continue running, but no new workers will be started until the
number of running autovacuum workers drops below
autovacuum_max_workers.

Reviewed-by: Sami Imseih, Justin Pryzby, Robert Haas, Andres Freund, Yogesh Sharma
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240410212344.GA1824549%40nathanxps13
2025-01-06 15:01:22 -06:00
Fujii Masao
632384d0eb doc: Clarify log level for VERBOSE messages in maintenance commands.
VERBOSE messages from ANALYZE, CLUSTER, REINDEX, and VACUUM are logged
at the INFO level, but this detail was missing from the documentation.
This commit updates the docs to mention the log level for these messages.

Author: Masahiro Ikeda
Reviewed-by: Yugo Nagata
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b4a4b7916982dccd9607c8efb3ce5116@oss.nttdata.com
2025-01-06 17:24:10 +09:00
Andrew Dunstan
30f0176263 Document strange jsonb sort order for empty top level arrays
Slightly faulty logic in the original jsonb code (commit d9134d0a35)
results in an empty top level array sorting less than a json null. We
can't change the sort order now since it would affect btree indexes over
jsonb, so document the anomaly.

Backpatch to all live branches (13 .. 17)

In master, also add a code comment noting the anomaly.

Reported-by: Yan Chengpen
Reviewed-by: Jian He

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OSBPR01MB45199DD8DA2D1CECD50518188E272@OSBPR01MB4519.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2025-01-03 10:36:30 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
50e6eb731d Update copyright for 2025
Backpatch-through: 13
2025-01-01 11:21:55 -05:00
Tom Lane
38da053463 Try to avoid semaphore-related test failures on NetBSD/OpenBSD.
These two platforms have a remarkably tight default limit on the
number of SysV semaphores in the system: SEMMNS is only 60
out-of-the-box.  Unless manual action is taken to raise that,
we'll only be able to allocate 3 sets of 16 usable semaphores
each, leading to initdb setting max_connections to just 20.
That's problematic because the core regression tests expect
to be able to launch 20 concurrent sessions, leaving us with
no headroom.  This seems to be the cause of intermittent
buildfarm failures on some machines.

While there's no getting around the fact that you'd better raise
SEMMNS for production use on these platforms, it does seem desirable
for "make check" to pass reliably without that.  We can make that
happen, at least for awhile longer, with two small changes:

* Change sysv_sema.c's SEMAS_PER_SET to 19, so that we can eat up
all of the available semas not just most of them.

* Change initdb to make the smallest max_connections value it will
consider be 25 not 20.

As of HEAD this will leave us with four free semaphores (using the
default values for other relevant parameters such as max_wal_senders).
So we won't need to consider this again until we've invented five
more background processes.  Maybe by then we can switch both these
platforms to some other semaphore API.

For the moment, do this only in master; there've not been field
complaints that might justify a back-patch.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/db2773a2-aca0-43d0-99c1-060efcd9954e@gmail.com
2024-12-23 16:46:24 -05:00
David Rowley
02a8d0c452 Remove pg_attribute.attcacheoff column
The column is no longer needed as the offset is now cached in the
CompactAttribute struct per commit 5983a4cff.

Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Victor Yegorov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvrBztXP3yx=NKNmo3xwFAFhEdyPnvrDg3=M0RhDs+4vYw@mail.gmail.com
2024-12-20 23:22:37 +13:00
Michael Paquier
9aea73fc61 Add backend-level statistics to pgstats
This adds a new variable-numbered statistics kind in pgstats, where the
object ID key of the stats entries is based on the proc number of the
backends.  This acts as an upper-bound for the number of stats entries
that can exist at once.  The entries are created when a backend starts
after authentication succeeds, and are removed when the backend exits,
making the stats entry exist for as long as their backend is up and
running.  These are not written to the pgstats file at shutdown (note
that write_to_file is disabled, as a safety measure).

Currently, these stats include only information about the I/O generated
by a backend, using the same layer as pg_stat_io, except that it is now
possible to know how much activity is happening in each backend rather
than an overall aggregate of all the activity.  A function called
pg_stat_get_backend_io() is added to access this data depending on the
PID of a backend.  The existing structure could be expanded in the
future to add more information about other statistics related to
backends, depending on requirements or ideas.

Auxiliary processes are not included in this set of statistics.  These
are less interesting to have than normal backends as they have dedicated
entries in pg_stat_io, and stats kinds of their own.

This commit includes also pg_stat_reset_backend_stats(), function able
to reset all the stats associated to a single backend.

Bump catalog version and PGSTAT_FILE_FORMAT_ID.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Michael Paquier, Nazir
Bilal Yavuz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZtXR+CtkEVVE/LHF@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2024-12-19 13:19:22 +09:00
Michael Paquier
477728b5d6 psql: Add more information about service name
This commit adds support for the following items in psql, able to show a
service name, when available:
- Variable SERVICE.
- Substitution %s in PROMPT{1,2,3}.

This relies on 4b99fed754, that has made the service name available in
PGconn for libpq.

Author: Michael Banck
Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6723c612.050a0220.1567f4.b94a@mx.google.com
2024-12-18 15:16:12 +09:00
Michael Paquier
4b99fed754 libpq: Add service name to PGconn and PQservice()
This commit adds one field to PGconn for the database service name (if
any), with PQservice() as routine to retrieve it.  Like the other
routines of this area, NULL is returned as result if the connection is
NULL.

A follow-up patch will make use of this feature to be able to display
the service name in the psql prompt.

Author: Michael Banck
Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane
Discusion: https://postgr.es/m/6723c612.050a0220.1567f4.b94a@mx.google.com
2024-12-18 14:53:42 +09:00
Amit Kapila
2364f61488 Doc: Fix the wrong link on pg_createsubscriber page.
Commit 84db9a0eb1 has added the incorrect link to
'initial data synchronization'. It was a subsection of Row Filter and
didn't provide the required information.

Author: Peter Smith
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Pavel Luzanov
Backpatch-through: 17, where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PtnA4DB_pcv4TDr4NjUSM1=P2N_cuZx5DX09k7LVmaqUA@mail.gmail.com
2024-12-17 15:08:29 +05:30
Tomas Vondra
0cc7da4e23 doc: Mention BRIN indexes support parallel builds
Two places in the documentation suggest B-tree is the only index access
method allowing parallel builds. Commit b4375717 added parallel builds
for BRIN too, but failed to update the docs. So fix that, and backpatch
to 17, where parallel BRIN builds were introduced.

Author: Egor Rogov
Backpatch-through: 17
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/114e2d5d-125e-07d8-94aa-5ad175fb7443@postgrespro.ru
2024-12-16 19:17:58 +01:00
Fujii Masao
56499315a7 doc: Clarify old WAL files are kept until they are summarized.
The documentation in wal.sgml explains that old WAL files cannot be
removed or recycled until they are archived (when WAL archiving is used)
or replicated (when using replication slots). However, it did not mention
that, similarly, old WAL files are also kept until they are summarized
if WAL summarization is enabled. This commit adds that clarification
to the documentation.

Back-patch to v17 where WAL summarization was added.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fd0eb0a5-f43b-4e06-b450-cbca011b6cff@oss.nttdata.com
2024-12-15 11:18:18 +09:00
Masahiko Sawada
78c5e141e9 Add UUID version 7 generation function.
This commit introduces the uuidv7() SQL function, which generates UUID
version 7 as specified in RFC 9652. UUIDv7 combines a Unix timestamp
in milliseconds and random bits, offering both uniqueness and
sortability.

In our implementation, the 12-bit sub-millisecond timestamp fraction
is stored immediately after the timestamp, in the space referred to as
"rand_a" in the RFC. This ensures additional monotonicity within a
millisecond. The rand_a bits also function as a counter. We select a
sub-millisecond timestamp so that it monotonically increases for
generated UUIDs within the same backend, even when the system clock
goes backward or when generating UUIDs at very high
frequency. Therefore, the monotonicity of generated UUIDs is ensured
within the same backend.

This commit also expands the uuid_extract_timestamp() function to
support UUID version 7.

Additionally, an alias uuidv4() is added for the existing
gen_random_uuid() SQL function to maintain consistency.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Andrey Borodin
Reviewed-by: Sergey Prokhorenko, Przemysław Sztoch, Nikolay Samokhvalov
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Jelte Fennema-Nio, Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Lukas Fittl, Michael Paquier, Japin Li
Reviewed-by: Marcos Pegoraro, Junwang Zhao, Stepan Neretin
Reviewed-by: Daniel Vérité
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAhFRxitJv%3DyoGnXUgeLB_O%2BM7J2BJAmb5jqAT9gZ3bij3uLDA%40mail.gmail.com
2024-12-11 15:54:41 -08:00
David Rowley
c2a4078eba Enable BUFFERS with EXPLAIN ANALYZE by default
The topic of turning EXPLAIN's BUFFERS option on with the ANALYZE option
has come up a few times over the past few years.  In many ways, doing this
seems like a good idea as it may be more obvious to users why a given
query is running more slowly than they might expect.  Also, from my own
(David's) personal experience, I've seen users posting to the mailing
lists with two identical plans, one slow and one fast asking why their
query is sometimes slow.  In many cases, this is due to additional reads.
Having BUFFERS on by default may help reduce some of these questions, and
if not, make it more obvious to the user before they post, or save a
round-trip to the mailing list when additional I/O effort is the cause of
the slowness.

The general consensus is that we want BUFFERS on by default with
ANALYZE.  However, there were more than zero concerns raised with doing
so.  The primary reason against is the additional verbosity, making it
harder to read large plans.  Another concern was that buffer information
isn't always useful so may not make sense to have it on by default.

It's currently December, so let's commit this to see if anyone comes
forward with a strong objection against making this change.  We have over
half a year remaining in the v18 cycle where we could still easily consider
reverting this if someone were to come forward with a convincing enough
reason as to why doing this is a bad idea.

There were two patches independently submitted to achieve this goal, one
by me and the other by Guillaume.  This commit is a mix of both of these
patches with some additional work done by me to adjust various
additional places in the documentation which include EXPLAIN ANALYZE
output.

Author: Guillaume Lelarge, David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Greg Sabino Mullane, Michael Christofides
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANNMO++W7MM8T0KyXN3ZheXXt-uLVM3aEtZd+WNfZ=obxffUiA@mail.gmail.com
2024-12-11 22:35:11 +13:00
Jeff Davis
a43567483c Use in-place updates for pg_restore_relation_stats().
This matches the behavior of vac_update_relstats(), which is important
to avoid bloating pg_class.

Author: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=fc3je+ufv3gsHqjjSSf+t8674RXpuXW62EL55MUEQd-g@mail.gmail.com
2024-12-10 16:30:37 -08:00
David Rowley
36d0229b8f Doc: fix incorrect EXPLAIN ANALYZE output for bloom indexes
It looks like the example case was once modified to increase the number
of rows but the EXPLAIN ANALYZE output wasn't updated to reflect that.

Also adjust the text which discusses the index sizes.  With the example
table size, the bloom index isn't quite 8 times more space efficient
than the btree indexes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvovx8kQ0=HTt85gFDAwmTJHpCgiSvRmQZ_6u_g-vQYM_w@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13, all supported versions
2024-12-10 09:24:43 +13:00
Peter Eisentraut
263a3f5f7f doc: remove LC_COLLATE and LC_CTYPE from SHOW command
The corresponding read-only server settings have been removed since
in PG16. See commit b0f6c43716.

Author: Pierre Giraud <pierre.giraud@dalibo.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/a75a2fb0-f4b3-4c0c-be3d-7a62d266d760%40dalibo.com
2024-12-07 12:55:55 +01:00
Bruce Momjian
24c1c63387 Return actual error code from FOP failure in PDF build
Previously we returned "1" on error.  Improvement on 77c189cdaf.

Backpatch-through: master
2024-12-04 14:37:24 -05:00
Amit Kapila
87ce27de69 Ensure stored generated columns must be published when required.
Ensure stored generated columns that are part of REPLICA IDENTITY must be
published explicitly for UPDATE and DELETE operations to be published. We
can publish generated columns by listing them in the column list or by
enabling the publish_generated_columns option.

This commit changes the behavior of the test added in commit adedf54e65 by
giving an ERROR for the UPDATE operation in such cases. There is no way to
trigger the bug reported in commit adedf54e65 but we didn't remove the
corresponding code change because it is still relevant when replicating
changes from a publisher with version less than 18.

We decided not to backpatch this behavior change to avoid the risk of
breaking existing output plugins that may be sending generated columns by
default although we are not aware of any such plugin. Also, we didn't see
any reports related to this on STABLE branches which is another reason not
to backpatch this change.

Author: Shlok Kyal, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANhcyEVw4V2Awe2AB6i0E5AJLNdASShGfdBLbUd1XtWDboymCA@mail.gmail.com
2024-12-04 09:45:18 +05:30
Bruce Momjian
77c189cdaf Properly use $(AWK) in Makefile, not 'awk'
Fix for commit 498f130756.

Backpatch-through: master
2024-12-03 22:31:33 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
498f130756 Fix Makefile so invalid characters warning preserves error code
Fix for commit e4c8865196.

Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/88cb6ecf-22bb-431e-974b-1cd236a80364@eisentraut.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-12-03 18:27:41 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
8b318a168a Now that we have non-Latin1 SGML detection, restore Latin1 chars
This reverts the change in commit 641a5b7a14 that converted them to
HTML entities.

Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Z05ssoVheWI-rqax@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: master
2024-12-03 17:09:49 -05:00
Michael Paquier
8817e8d3a4 doc: Clarify some terms for pg_createsubscriber
The last section of pg_createsubscriber used the terms
"publication-name", "replication-slot-name", and "subscription-name".
These terms are not defined on the page, which was confusing, and the
intention is clearly to refer to the values one would give to the
options --publication, --subscription and --replication-slot.  Let's
simplify the documentation by mentioning the option switches, instead of
these terms.

Reported-by: Christophe Courtois
Author: Shubham Khanna
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C, Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173288198026.714.15127074046508836738@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 17
2024-12-03 16:21:07 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
e4c8865196 doc Makefile: issue warning about chars that cannot be output
A follow-up improvement to commit 641a5b7a14.

Reported-by: Tatsuo Ishii, Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20241126.182513.1752581942460106099.ishii@postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-12-02 21:25:12 -05:00
Nathan Bossart
db6a4a985b Deprecate MD5 passwords.
MD5 has been considered to be unsuitable for use as a cryptographic
hash algorithm for some time.  Furthermore, MD5 password hashes in
PostgreSQL are vulnerable to pass-the-hash attacks, i.e., knowing
the username and hashed password is sufficient to authenticate.
The SCRAM-SHA-256 method added in v10 is not subject to these
problems and is considered to be superior to MD5.

This commit marks MD5 password support in PostgreSQL as deprecated
and to be removed in a future release.  The documentation now
contains several deprecation notices, and CREATE ROLE and ALTER
ROLE now emit deprecation warnings when setting MD5 passwords.  The
warnings can be disabled by setting the md5_password_warnings
parameter to "off".

Reviewed-by: Greg Sabino Mullane, Jim Nasby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZwbfpJJol7lDWajL%40nathan
2024-12-02 13:30:07 -06:00
Peter Eisentraut
49ae9fd8b7 doc: Fix typo
for commit 1e08905842

Reported-by: Marcos Pegoraro <marcos@f10.com.br>
2024-11-30 08:43:46 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
1e08905842 doc: Improve description of referential actions
Some of the differences between NO ACTION and RESTRICT were not
explained fully.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/ea5b2777-266a-46fa-852f-6fca6ec480ad@eisentraut.org
2024-11-29 08:53:00 +01:00
Thomas Munro
1758d42446 Require ucrt if using MinGW.
Historically we tolerated the absence of various C runtime library
features for the benefit of the MinGW tool chain, because it used
ancient msvcrt.dll for a long period of time.  It now uses ucrt by
default (like Windows 10+, Visual Studio 2015+), and that's the only
configuration we're testing.

In practice, we effectively required ucrt already in PostgreSQL 17, when
commit 8d9a9f03 required _create_locale etc, first available in
msvcr120.dll (Visual Studio 2013, the last of the pre-ucrt series of
runtimes), and for MinGW users that practically meant ucrt because it
was difficult or impossible to use msvcr120.dll.  That may even not have
been the first such case, but old MinGW configurations had already
dropped off our testing radar so we weren't paying much attention.

This commit formalizes the requirement.  It also removes a couple of
obsolete comments that discussed msvcrt.dll limitations, and some tests
of !defined(_MSC_VER) to imply msvcrt.dll.  There are many more
anachronisms, but it'll take some time to figure out how to remove them
all.  APIs affected relate to locales, UTF-8, threads, large files and
more.

Thanks to Peter Eisentraut for the documentation change.  It's not
really necessary to talk about ucrt explicitly in such a short section,
since it's the default for MinGW-w64 and MSYS2.  It's enough to prune
references and broken links to much older tools.

Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d9e7731c-ca1b-477c-9298-fa51e135574a%40eisentraut.org
2024-11-27 23:13:45 +13:00
Peter Eisentraut
85b7efa1cd Support LIKE with nondeterministic collations
This allows for example using LIKE with case-insensitive collations.
There was previously no internal implementation of this, so it was met
with a not-supported error.  This adds the internal implementation and
removes the error.  The implementation follows the specification of
the SQL standard for this.

Unlike with deterministic collations, the LIKE matching cannot go
character by character but has to go substring by substring.  For
example, if we are matching against LIKE 'foo%bar', we can't start by
looking for an 'f', then an 'o', but instead with have to find
something that matches 'foo'.  This is because the collation could
consider substrings of different lengths to be equal.  This is all
internal to MatchText() in like_match.c.

The changes in GenericMatchText() in like.c just pass through the
locale information to MatchText(), which was previously not needed.
This matches exactly Generic_Text_IC_like() below.

ILIKE is not affected.  (It's unclear whether ILIKE makes sense under
nondeterministic collations.)

This also updates match_pattern_prefix() in like_support.c to support
optimizing the case of an exact pattern with nondeterministic
collations.  This was already alluded to in the previous code.

(includes documentation examples from Daniel Vérité and test cases
from Paul A Jungwirth)

Reviewed-by: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/700d2e86-bf75-4607-9cf2-f5b7802f6e88@eisentraut.org
2024-11-27 08:19:42 +01:00
Michael Paquier
d0eb4297cc Handle better implicit transaction state of pipeline mode
When using a pipeline, a transaction starts from the first command and
is committed with a Sync message or when the pipeline ends.

Functions like IsInTransactionBlock() or PreventInTransactionBlock()
were already able to understand a pipeline as being in a transaction
block, but it was not the case of CheckTransactionBlock().  This
function is called for example to generate a WARNING for SET LOCAL,
complaining that it is used outside of a transaction block.

The current state of the code caused multiple problems, like:
- SET LOCAL executed at any stage of a pipeline issued a WARNING, even
if the command was at least second in line where the pipeline is in a
transaction state.
- LOCK TABLE failed when invoked at any step of a pipeline, even if it
should be able to work within a transaction block.

The pipeline protocol assumes that the first command of a pipeline is
not part of a transaction block, and that any follow-up commands is
considered as within a transaction block.

This commit changes the backend so as an implicit transaction block is
started each time the first Execute message of a pipeline has finished
processing, with this implicit transaction block ended once a sync is
processed.  The checks based on XACT_FLAGS_PIPELINING in the routines
checking if we are in a transaction block are not necessary: it is
enough to rely on the existing ones.

Some tests are added to pgbench, that can be backpatched down to v17
when \syncpipeline is involved and down to v14 where \startpipeline and
\endpipeline are available.  This is unfortunately limited regarding the
error patterns that can be checked, but it provides coverage for various
pipeline combinations to check if these succeed or fail.  These tests
are able to capture the case of SET LOCAL's WARNING.  The author has
proposed a different feature to improve the coverage by adding similar
meta-commands to psql where error messages could be checked, something
more useful for the cases where commands cannot be used in transaction
blocks, like REINDEX CONCURRENTLY or VACUUM.  This is considered as
future work for v18~.

Author: Anthonin Bonnefoy
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO6_XqrWO8uNBQrSu5r6jh+vTGi5Oiyk4y8yXDORdE2jbzw8xw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2024-11-27 09:31:22 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
6e80951f49 Fix commit 641a5b7a14 for "nbsp" output in SVG files
In commit 641a5b7a14, I removed "nbsp" characters from SVG files, not
realizing the SVG files were generated from GV files and that the "nbsp"
characters were caused by trailing ASCII spaces in GV files.  This
commit restores the "nbsp" SVG characters and adds a GV comment about
how the trailing spaces cause the "nbsp" output.

Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2c5dd601-b245-4092-9c27-6d1ad51609df%40eisentraut.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-26 13:08:13 -05:00
Richard Guo
a8ccf4e93a Reordering DISTINCT keys to match input path's pathkeys
The ordering of DISTINCT items is semantically insignificant, so we
can reorder them as needed.  In fact, in the parser, we absorb the
sorting semantics of the sortClause as much as possible into the
distinctClause, ensuring that one clause is a prefix of the other.
This can help avoid a possible need to re-sort.

In this commit, we attempt to adjust the DISTINCT keys to match the
input path's pathkeys.  This can likewise help avoid re-sorting, or
allow us to use incremental-sort to save efforts.

For DISTINCT ON expressions, the parser already ensures that they
match the initial ORDER BY expressions.  When reordering the DISTINCT
keys, we must ensure that the resulting pathkey list matches the
initial distinctClause pathkeys.

This introduces a new GUC, enable_distinct_reordering, which allows
the optimization to be disabled if needed.

Author: Richard Guo
Reviewed-by: Andrei Lepikhov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMbWs48dR26cCcX0f=8bja2JKQPcU64136kHk=xekHT9xschiQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-11-26 09:25:18 +09:00
Amit Kapila
d05a387d9d Doc: Clarify the inactive_since field description.
Updated to specify that it represents the exact time a slot became
inactive, rather than the period of inactivity.

Reported-by: Peter Smith
Author: Bruce Momjian, Nisha Moond
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith
Backpatch-through: 17
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PuvsyA5v8y7rYoY9mkDQzUhwaESM05yCByTMaDoRh30tA@mail.gmail.com
2024-11-25 11:12:32 +05:30
Michael Paquier
2ff7c913d9 doc: Fix example with __next__() in PL/Python function
Per PEP 3114, iterator.next() has been renamed to iterator.__next__(),
and one example in the documentation still used next().  This caused the
example provided to fail the function creation since Python 2 is not
supported anymore since 19252e8ec9.

Author: Erik Wienhold
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173209043143.2092749.13692266486972491694@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 15
2024-11-25 09:15:25 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
4c4aaa19a6 doc: clarify how logical replication takes its initial snapshot
Reported-by: Koen De Groote

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/171606613152.686.7693963105919927503@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-21 17:14:33 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
70236cf22f doc: clarify that jsonb_path_match() returns an SQL boolean
Not a JSON boolean.  Also clarify that other predicate check expressions
functions return a JSON boolean, not an SQL boolean.

Reported-by: jian he

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxH7tP1NXCHN1bUBXcEB=dv7-qE+ZjB3UxwK6Em+9Qzb9Q@mail.gmail.com

Backpatch-through: 17
2024-11-20 17:03:45 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
f722dd32de clarify --no-comments option in --help and SGML files
The previous commit, b38bac26e2, missed these cases for dump/restore.

Reported-by: Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3495698.1731968093@sss.pgh.pa.us

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-20 14:48:31 -05:00
Fujii Masao
6c8f670323 file_fdw: Add REJECT_LIMIT option to file_fdw.
Commit 4ac2a9bece introduced the REJECT_LIMIT option for the COPY
command. This commit extends the support for this option to file_fdw.

As well as REJECT_LIMIT option for COPY, this option limits
the maximum number of erroneous rows that can be skipped.
If the number of data type conversion errors exceeds this limit,
accessing the file_fdw foreign table will fail with an error,
even when on_error = 'ignore' is specified.

Since the CREATE/ALTER FOREIGN TABLE commands require foreign
table options to be single-quoted, this commit updates
defGetCopyRejectLimitOption() to handle also string value for them,
in addition to int64 value for COPY command option.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao, Yugo Nagata, Kirill Reshke
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bab68a9fc502b12693f0755b6f35f327@oss.nttdata.com
2024-11-20 23:53:19 +09:00
Michael Paquier
15afb7d61c doc: Fix section of functions age(xid) and mxid_age(xid)
In 17~, age(xid) and mxid_age(xid) were listed as deprecated.  Based on
the discussion that led to 48b5aa3143, this is not intentional as this
could break many existing monitoring queries.  Note that vacuumdb also
uses both of them.

In 16, both functions were listed under "Control Data Functions", which
is incorrect, so let's move them to the list of functions related to
transaction IDs and snapshots.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zzr2zZFyeFKXWe8a@ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20231114013224.4z6oxa6p6va33rxr@awork3.anarazel.de
Backpatch-through: 16
2024-11-20 14:20:52 +09:00
Fujii Masao
c166454496 Improve error message for database object stats manipulation functions.
Previously, database object statistics manipulation functions like
pg_set_relation_stats() reported unclear error and hint messages
when executed during recovery. These messages were "internal",
making it difficult for users to understand the issue:

  ERROR:  cannot acquire lock mode ShareUpdateExclusiveLock on database objects while recovery is in progress
  HINT:  Only RowExclusiveLock or less can be acquired on database objects during recovery.

This commit updates the error handling so that, if these functions
are called during recovery, they produce clearer messages:

  ERROR:  recovery is in progress
  HINT:  Statistics cannot be modified during recovery.

The related documentation has also been updated to explicitly
clarify that these functions are not available during recovery.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas, Maxim Orlov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6d313829-5f56-4a28-ae4b-bd01bf1ae791@oss.nttdata.com
2024-11-20 02:00:50 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
b38bac26e2 doc: clarify pg_dump --no-comments meaning as SQL comments
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZyjdAjEsXbFPkD3t@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-18 16:30:33 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
cffca3665d doc: clarify text about combining row-level policies
Reported-by: splarv@ya.ru

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/173045909386.700.9231055113418242392@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-18 15:34:59 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
9321d2fdf8 Fix collation handling for foreign keys
Allowing foreign keys where the referenced and the referencing columns
have collations with different notions of equality is problematic.
This can only happen when using nondeterministic collations, for
example, if the referencing column is case-insensitive and the
referenced column is not, or vice versa.  It does not happen if both
collations are deterministic.

To show one example:

    CREATE COLLATION case_insensitive (provider = icu, deterministic = false, locale = 'und-u-ks-level2');

    CREATE TABLE pktable (x text COLLATE "C" PRIMARY KEY);
    CREATE TABLE fktable (x text COLLATE case_insensitive REFERENCES pktable ON UPDATE CASCADE ON DELETE CASCADE);
    INSERT INTO pktable VALUES ('A'), ('a');
    INSERT INTO fktable VALUES ('A');

    BEGIN; DELETE FROM pktable WHERE x = 'a'; TABLE fktable; ROLLBACK;
    BEGIN; DELETE FROM pktable WHERE x = 'A'; TABLE fktable; ROLLBACK;

Both of these DELETE statements delete the one row from fktable.  So
this means that one row from fktable references two rows in pktable,
which should not happen.  (That's why a primary key or unique
constraint is required on pktable.)

When nondeterministic collations were implemented, the SQL standard
available to yours truly said that referential integrity checks should
be performed with the collation of the referenced column, and so
that's how we implemented it.  But this turned out to be a mistake in
the SQL standard, for the same reasons as above, that was later
(SQL:2016) fixed to require both collations to be the same.  So that's
what we are aiming for here.

We don't have to be quite so strict.  We can allow different
collations if they are both deterministic.  This is also good for
backward compatibility.

So the new rule is that the collations either have to be the same or
both deterministic.  Or in other words, if one of them is
nondeterministic, then both have to be the same.

Users upgrading from before that have affected setups will need to
make changes to their schemas (i.e., change one or both collations in
affected foreign-key relationships) before the upgrade will succeed.

Some of the nice test cases for the previous situation in
collate.icu.utf8.sql are now obsolete.  They are changed to just check
the error checking of the new rule.  Note that collate.sql already
contained a test for foreign keys with different deterministic
collations.

A bunch of code in ri_triggers.c that added a COLLATE clause to
enforce the referenced column's collation can be removed, because both
columns now have to have the same notion of equality, so it doesn't
matter which one to use.

Reported-by: Paul Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/78d824e0-b21e-480d-a252-e4b84bc2c24b@illuminatedcomputing.com
2024-11-15 14:55:54 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
f683ba0867 doc: Update pg_constraint.conexclop docs for WITHOUT OVERLAPS
Fixup for commit fc0438b4e8.

Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/57ea0668-5205-426e-b934-efc89f2186c2@illuminatedcomputing.com
2024-11-13 09:05:02 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
d56af4c882 doc: Add PERIOD to ALTER TABLE reference docs
Commit 89f908a6d0 documented foreign keys with PERIOD in the CREATE
TABLE docs, but not in ALTER TABLE.  This commit adds the new syntax
to the ALTER TABLE docs.

Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/57ea0668-5205-426e-b934-efc89f2186c2@illuminatedcomputing.com
2024-11-13 08:53:08 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
94daf80bd1 doc: Small improvement in CREATE TABLE / PERIOD documentation
Use placeholders that are more consistent and match the description
better.  Fixup for commit 89f908a6d0.
2024-11-13 08:51:23 +01:00
Peter Eisentraut
bf62105950 doc: Add WITHOUT OVERLAPS to ALTER TABLE reference docs
Commit fc0438b4e8 documented WITHOUT OVERLAPS in the CREATE TABLE
docs, but not in ALTER TABLE.  This commit adds the new syntax to the
ALTER TABLE docs.

Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/57ea0668-5205-426e-b934-efc89f2186c2@illuminatedcomputing.com
2024-11-13 08:42:34 +01:00
Noah Misch
b7e3a52a87 Block environment variable mutations from trusted PL/Perl.
Many process environment variables (e.g. PATH), bypass the containment
expected of a trusted PL.  Hence, trusted PLs must not offer features
that achieve setenv().  Otherwise, an attacker having USAGE privilege on
the language often can achieve arbitrary code execution, even if the
attacker lacks a database server operating system user.

To fix PL/Perl, replace trusted PL/Perl %ENV with a tied hash that just
replaces each modification attempt with a warning.  Sites that reach
these warnings should evaluate the application-specific implications of
proceeding without the environment modification:

  Can the application reasonably proceed without the modification?

    If no, switch to plperlu or another approach.

    If yes, the application should change the code to stop attempting
    environment modifications.  If that's too difficult, add "untie
    %main::ENV" in any code executed before the warning.  For example,
    one might add it to the start of the affected function or even to
    the plperl.on_plperl_init setting.

In passing, link to Perl's guidance about the Perl features behind the
security posture of PL/Perl.

Back-patch to v12 (all supported versions).

Andrew Dunstan and Noah Misch

Security: CVE-2024-10979
2024-11-11 06:23:43 -08:00
Amit Kapila
220cea9411 Doc: Add links to clarify the max_replication_slots.
The GUC max_replication_slots has a different meaning for sending servers
and subscribers. Add cross-links in each section for easy reference.

Author: Tristan Partin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/D5FNEPMMFHFX.1OQBCML0TU5AH@partin.io
2024-11-11 15:24:40 +05:30
Michael Paquier
e7a9496de9 Add two attributes to pg_stat_database for parallel workers activity
Two attributes are added to pg_stat_database:
* parallel_workers_to_launch, counting the total number of parallel
workers that were planned to be launched.
* parallel_workers_launched, counting the total number of parallel
workers actually launched.

The ratio of both fields can provide hints that there are not enough
slots available when launching parallel workers, also useful when
pg_stat_statements is not deployed on an instance (i.e. cf54a2c002).

This commit relies on de3a2ea3b2, that has added two fields to EState,
that get incremented when executing Gather or GatherMerge nodes.

A test is added in select_parallel, where parallel workers are spawned.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Benoit Lobréau
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/783bc7f7-659a-42fa-99dd-ee0565644e25@dalibo.com
2024-11-11 10:40:48 +09:00
Michael Paquier
bf8835ea97 libpq: Bail out during SSL/GSS negotiation errors
This commit changes libpq so that errors reported by the backend during
the protocol negotiation for SSL and GSS are discarded by the client, as
these may include bytes that could be consumed by the client and write
arbitrary bytes to a client's terminal.

A failure with the SSL negotiation now leads to an error immediately
reported, without a retry on any other methods allowed, like a fallback
to a plaintext connection.

A failure with GSS discards the error message received, and we allow a
fallback as it may be possible that the error is caused by a connection
attempt with a pre-11 server, GSS encryption having been introduced in
v12.  This was a problem only with v17 and newer versions; older
versions discard the error message already in this case, assuming a
failure caused by a lack of support for GSS encryption.

Author: Jacob Champion
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Heikki Linnakangas, Michael Paquier
Security: CVE-2024-10977
Backpatch-through: 12
2024-11-11 10:19:52 +09:00
Álvaro Herrera
14e87ffa5c
Add pg_constraint rows for not-null constraints
We now create contype='n' pg_constraint rows for not-null constraints on
user tables.  Only one such constraint is allowed for a column.

We propagate these constraints to other tables during operations such as
adding inheritance relationships, creating and attaching partitions and
creating tables LIKE other tables.  These related constraints mostly
follow the well-known rules of conislocal and coninhcount that we have
for CHECK constraints, with some adaptations: for example, as opposed to
CHECK constraints, we don't match not-null ones by name when descending
a hierarchy to alter or remove it, instead matching by the name of the
column that they apply to.  This means we don't require the constraint
names to be identical across a hierarchy.

The inheritance status of these constraints can be controlled: now we
can be sure that if a parent table has one, then all children will have
it as well.  They can optionally be marked NO INHERIT, and then children
are free not to have one.  (There's currently no support for altering a
NO INHERIT constraint into inheriting down the hierarchy, but that's a
desirable future feature.)

This also opens the door for having these constraints be marked NOT
VALID, as well as allowing UNIQUE+NOT NULL to be used for functional
dependency determination, as envisioned by commit e49ae8d3bc.  It's
likely possible to allow DEFERRABLE constraints as followup work, as
well.

psql shows these constraints in \d+, though we may want to reconsider if
this turns out to be too noisy.  Earlier versions of this patch hid
constraints that were on the same columns of the primary key, but I'm
not sure that that's very useful.  If clutter is a problem, we might be
better off inventing a new \d++ command and not showing the constraints
in \d+.

For now, we omit these constraints on system catalog columns, because
they're unlikely to achieve anything.

The main difference to the previous attempt at this (b0e96f3119) is
that we now require that such a constraint always exists when a primary
key is in the column; we didn't require this previously which had a
number of unpalatable consequences.  With this requirement, the code is
easier to reason about.  For example:

- We no longer have "throwaway constraints" during pg_dump.  We needed
  those for the case where a table had a PK without a not-null
  underneath, to prevent a slow scan of the data during restore of the
  PK creation, which was particularly problematic for pg_upgrade.

- We no longer have to cope with attnotnull being set spuriously in
  case a primary key is dropped indirectly (e.g., via DROP COLUMN).

Some bits of code in this patch were authored by Jian He.

Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Author: Bernd Helmle <mailings@oopsware.de>
Reviewed-by: 何建 (jian he) <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: 王刚 (Tender Wang) <tndrwang@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202408310358.sdhumtyuy2ht@alvherre.pgsql
2024-11-08 13:28:48 +01:00
Álvaro Herrera
f56a01ebdb
doc: Reword ALTER TABLE ATTACH restriction on NO INHERIT constraints
The previous wording is easy to read incorrectly; this change makes it
simpler, less ambiguous, and less prominent.

Backpatch to all live branches.

Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202411051201.zody6mld7vkw@alvherre.pgsql
2024-11-07 14:06:24 +01:00
Amit Kapila
7054186c4e Replicate generated columns when 'publish_generated_columns' is set.
This patch builds on the work done in commit 745217a051 by enabling the
replication of generated columns alongside regular column changes through
a new publication parameter: publish_generated_columns.

Example usage:
CREATE PUBLICATION pub1 FOR TABLE tab_gencol WITH (publish_generated_columns = true);

The column list takes precedence. If the generated columns are specified
in the column list, they will be replicated even if
'publish_generated_columns' is set to false. Conversely, if generated
columns are not included in the column list (assuming the user specifies a
column list), they will not be replicated even if
'publish_generated_columns' is true.

Author: Vignesh C, Shubham Khanna
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila, Hayato Kuroda, Shlok Kyal, Ajin Cherian, Hou Zhijie, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B80D17B2-2C8E-4C7D-87F2-E5B4BE3C069E@gmail.com
2024-11-07 08:58:49 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
a0be94067e doc: Remove event trigger firing matrix
This is difficult to maintain accurately, and it was probably already
somewhat incorrect, especially in the sql_drop and table_rewrite
categories.

The prior section already documented which DDL commands are *not*
supported (which was also slightly outdated), so let's expand that a
bit and just rely on that instead of listing out each command in full
detail.

Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Jian He <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CACJufxE_UAuxcM08BW5oVsg34v0cFWoEt8yBa5xSAoKLmL6LTQ%40mail.gmail.com
2024-11-06 13:43:17 +01:00
Alexander Korotkov
3a7ae6b3d9 Revert pg_wal_replay_wait() stored procedure
This commit reverts 3c5db1d6b0, and subsequent improvements and fixes
including 8036d73ae3, 867d396ccd, 3ac3ec580c, 0868d7ae70, 85b98b8d5a,
2520226c95, 014f9f34d2, e658038772, e1555645d7, 5035172e4a, 6cfebfe88b,
73da6b8d1b, and e546989a26.

The reason for reverting is a set of remaining issues.  Most notably, the
stored procedure appears to need more effort than the utility statement
to turn the backend into a "snapshot-less" state.  This makes an approach
to use stored procedures questionable.

Catversion is bumped.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zyhj2anOPRKtb0xW%40paquier.xyz
2024-11-04 22:47:57 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
3293b718a0 doc: use more accurate URL for bug reporting
Reported-by: nat@makarevitch.org

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172947609746.699.14488791149769110078@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-04 15:08:01 -05:00
Tom Lane
b1008c1f01 pg_basebackup, pg_receivewal: fix failure to find password in ~/.pgpass.
Sloppy refactoring in commit cca97ce6a caused these programs
to pass dbname = NULL to libpq if there was no "--dbname" switch
on the command line, where before "replication" would be passed.
This didn't break things completely, because the source server doesn't
care about the dbname specified for a physical replication connection.
However, it did cause libpq to fail to match a ~/.pgpass entry that
has "replication" in the dbname field.  Restore the previous behavior
of passing "replication".

Also, closer inspection shows that if you do specify a dbname
in the connection string, that is what will be matched to ~/.pgpass,
not "replication".  This was the pre-existing behavior so we should
not change it, but the SGML docs were pretty misleading about it.
Improve that.

Per bug #18685 from Toshi Harada.  Back-patch to v17 where the
error crept in.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18685-fee2dd142b9688f1@postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2702546.1730740456@sss.pgh.pa.us
2024-11-04 14:36:11 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
32d07a000f doc: remove check of SVG files, since they are derived
revert of change from commit 641a5b7a14

Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2c5dd601-b245-4092-9c27-6d1ad51609df@eisentraut.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-04 14:10:34 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
0d82970336 docs: Consistently use <optional> to indicate optional parameters
Some functions were using square brackets instead, replace them all
with <optional>.

Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CACJufxFfUbSph5UUSsZbL4SitbuPuW%3DEccpKgEaZrjtrPPuadQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-11-04 18:28:40 +02:00
Bruce Momjian
7ac744e72c doc: fix typo in mvcc clarification in commit 2fa255ce9b
Reported-by: Erik Rijkers (private email)

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-04 09:24:58 -05:00
Heikki Linnakangas
3d1aec225a Make PG_TEST_EXTRA env var override the "meson setup" option
"meson test" used to ignore the PG_TEST_EXTRA environment variable,
which meant that in order to run additional tests, you had to run
"meson setup -DPG_TEST_EXTRA=...". That's somewhat expensive, and not
consistent with autoconf builds. Allow PG_TEST_EXTRA environment
variable to override the setup-time option at run time, so that you
can do "PG_TEST_EXTRA=... meson test".

To implement this, the configuration time value is passed as an extra
"--pg-test-extra" argument to testwrap instead of adding it to the
test environment. If the environment variable is set at the time of
running test, testwrap uses the value from the environment variable
and ignores the --pg-test-extra option.

Now that "meson test" obeys the environment variable, we can remove it
from the "meson setup" steps in the CI script. It will now be picked
up from the environment variable like with "make check".

Author: Nazir Bilal Yavuzk, Ashutosh Bapat
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat with inputs from Tom Lane and Andrew Dunstan
2024-11-04 14:09:25 +02:00
Amit Kapila
5b0c46ea09 Doc: Update the behavior of generated columns in Logical Replication.
Commit 745217a051 misses updating the new behavior of generated columns in
logical replication at a few places.

Reported-by: Peter Smith, Ajin Cherian
Author: Vignesh C
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm2JOO7szz9+uaQbjmgZOfzbM_9tAQdFF8H5BjkQeaJs0A@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B80D17B2-2C8E-4C7D-87F2-E5B4BE3C069E@gmail.com
2024-11-04 09:39:30 +05:30
Bruce Momjian
2fa255ce9b doc: clarify text around MVCC example query
Reported-by: marlene.brandstaetter@cargonet.software

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/167765529052.987840.12345375075704447735@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-01 16:38:16 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4a9effe45e doc: remove useless MERGE example
Reported-by: dwayne.towell@gmail.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/167699245721.1902146.6479762301617101634@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-01 16:20:27 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e1a76db1a8 doc: improve tablespace example query and link to helper funcs.
Reported-by: Agustín

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172609721070.1128084.6724666076293146476@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-01 15:54:16 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
4200fea80e doc: fix ALTER DOMAIN domain_constraint to spell out options
It used to refer to CREATE DOMAIN, but CREATE DOMAIN allows NULL, while
ALTER DOMAIN does not.

Reported-by: elionescu@yahoo.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172225092461.915373.6103973717483380183@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 12
2024-11-01 13:54:28 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
94a8c19eed doc: explain how the home directory is found on Unix-like syst.
Done for libpq, postgres-fdw, and psql.

Reported-by: marc@msys.ch

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwZ-T-zsVM7gApS9-XU9vGxC7Oa-UyRQPVcJFagNU=AjOw@mail.gmail.com

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-01 13:32:21 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
1eb5564230 doc: Add link to listen_addresses as cause of connection failure
Reported-by: k.man.113@gmail.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/171494070007.703.17021965362263796980@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-01 13:15:09 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
641a5b7a14 doc: improve build for non-Latin1 characters
Add README.non-ASCII to explain non-ASCII doc behavior; some text moved
from release.sgml.

Change UTF8 SGML characters to use HTML entities.

Remove unnecessary UTF8 spaces.

Add SVG file check for check-nbsp target.

Add dummy 'pdf' Makefile target.

Reported-by: Yugo Nagata

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20241011114122.c90f8a871462da36f2e2afeb@sraoss.co.jp

Backpatch-through: master
2024-11-01 12:46:51 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
6d5444c9ed doc: remove mention of ActiveState for Perl and Tcl on Windows
Replace with Strawberry Perl and Magicsplat Tcl.

Reported-by: Yasir Hussain

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA9OW9fAAM_WDYYpAquqF6j1hmfRMzHPsFkRfP5E6oSfkF=dMA@mail.gmail.com

Backpatch-through: 12
2024-11-01 11:30:54 -04:00
Michael Paquier
49d6c7d8da Add SQL function array_reverse()
This function takes in input an array, and reverses the position of all
its elements.  This operation only affects the first dimension of the
array, like array_shuffle().

The implementation structure is inspired by array_shuffle(), with a
subroutine called array_reverse_n() that may come in handy in the
future, should more functions able to reverse portions of arrays be
introduced.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat, Tom Lane, Vladlen Popolitov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TMpeO_ke+QGOaAx9xdJuxa7r=49-anMh3G5476e3CX1CA@mail.gmail.com
2024-11-01 10:32:19 +09:00
Amit Kapila
745217a051 Replicate generated columns when specified in the column list.
This commit allows logical replication to publish and replicate generated
columns when explicitly listed in the column list. We also ensured that
the generated columns were copied during the initial tablesync when they
were published.

We will allow to replicate generated columns even when they are not
specified in the column list (via a new publication option) in a separate
commit.

The motivation of this work is to allow replication for cases where the
client doesn't have generated columns. For example, the case where one is
trying to replicate data from Postgres to the non-Postgres database.

Author: Shubham Khanna, Vignesh C, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Hayato Kuroda, Shlok Kyal, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B80D17B2-2C8E-4C7D-87F2-E5B4BE3C069E@gmail.com
2024-10-30 12:36:26 +05:30
David Rowley
84b8fccbe5 Doc: add detail about EXPLAIN's "Disabled" property
c01743aa4 and later 161320b4b adjusted the EXPLAIN output to show which
plan nodes were chosen despite being disabled by the various enable*
GUCs.  Prior to e22253467, the disabledness of a node was only evident by
a large startup cost penalty.  Since we now explicitly tag disabled nodes
with a boolean property in EXPLAIN, let's add some documentation to
provide some details about why and when disabled nodes can appear in the
plan.

Author: Laurenz Albe, David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/883729e429267214753d5e438c82c73a58c3db5d.camel@cybertec.at
2024-10-29 23:28:12 +13:00
Michael Paquier
4b7bba49e7 doc: Add better description for rewrite functions in event triggers
There are two functions that can be used in event triggers to get more
details about a rewrite happening on a relation.  Both had a limited
documentation:
- pg_event_trigger_table_rewrite_reason() and
pg_event_trigger_table_rewrite_oid() were not mentioned in the main
event trigger section in the paragraph dedicated to the event
table_rewrite.
- pg_event_trigger_table_rewrite_reason() returns an integer which is a
bitmap of the reasons why a rewrite happens.  There was no explanation
about the meaning of these values, forcing the reader to look at the
code to find out that these are defined in event_trigger.h.

While on it, let's add a comment in event_trigger.h where the
AT_REWRITE_* are defined, telling to update the documentation when
these values are changed.

Backpatch down to 13 as a consequence of 1ad23335f3, where this area
of the documentation has been heavily reworked.

Author: Greg Sabino Mullane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKAnmmL+Z6j-C8dAx1tVrnBmZJu+BSoc68WSg3sR+CVNjBCqbw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 13
2024-10-29 15:35:01 +09:00
David Rowley
dda781609f Doc: clarify enable_indexscan=off also disabled Index Only Scans
Disabling enable_indexscan has always also disabled Index Only Scans.
Here we make that more clear in the documentation in an attempt to
prevent future complaints complaining about this expected behavior.

Reported-by: Melanie Plageman
Author: David G. Johnston, David Rowley
Backpatch-through: 12, oldest supported version
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAKRu_atV=kovgpaLREyG68PB5+ncKvJ2UNoeRetEgyC3Yb5Sw@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-29 16:24:10 +13:00
Amit Kapila
1bf1140be8 Change the default value of the streaming option to 'parallel'.
Previously the default value of streaming option for a subscription was
'off'. The parallel option indicates that the changes in large
transactions (greater than logical_decoding_work_mem) are to be applied
directly via one of the parallel apply workers, if available.

The parallel mode was introduced in 16, but we refrain from enabling it by
default to avoid seeing any unpleasant behavior in the existing
applications. However we haven't found any such report yet, so this is a
good time to enable it by default.

Reported-by: Vignesh C
Author: Hayato Kuroda, Masahiko Sawada, Peter Smith, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm1=MedhW23NuoePJTmonwsMSp80ddsw+sEJs0GUMC_kqQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-28 08:42:05 +05:30
Daniel Gustafsson
0fe173680e doc: Fix typo in pg_restore_*_stats function documentation
Fix accidental typo from d32d146399, s/intepretation/interpretation/
2024-10-25 14:00:13 +02:00
Amit Kapila
b8a046081c Doc: Add a caution in alter publication.
Clarify that altering the 'publish_via_partition_root' option can lead to
data loss or duplication when a partition root table is specified as the
replication target.

Reported-by: Maxim Boguk
Author: Hayato Kuroda
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Peter Smith, Vignesh C
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18644-6866bbd22178ee16@postgresql.org
2024-10-25 14:19:05 +05:30
Jeff Davis
d32d146399 Add functions pg_restore_relation_stats(), pg_restore_attribute_stats().
Similar to the pg_set_*_stats() functions, except with a variadic
signature that's designed to be more future-proof. Additionally, most
problems are reported as WARNINGs rather than ERRORs, allowing most
stats to be restored even if some cannot.

These functions are intended to be called from pg_dump to avoid the
need to run ANALYZE after an upgrade.

Author: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=eErgzn7ECDpwFcptJKOk9SxZEk5Pot4d94eVTZsvj3gw@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-24 12:08:00 -07:00
Daniel Gustafsson
45188c2ea2 Support configuring TLSv1.3 cipher suites
The ssl_ciphers GUC can only set cipher suites for TLSv1.2, and lower,
connections. For TLSv1.3 connections a different OpenSSL API must be
used.  This adds a new GUC, ssl_tls13_ciphers, which can be used to
configure a colon separated list of cipher suites to support when
performing a TLSv1.3 handshake.

Original patch by Erica Zhang with additional hacking by me.

Author: Erica Zhang <ericazhangy2021@qq.com>
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/tencent_063F89FA72CCF2E48A0DF5338841988E9809@qq.com
2024-10-24 15:20:32 +02:00
Daniel Gustafsson
3d1ef3a15c Support configuring multiple ECDH curves
The ssl_ecdh_curve GUC only accepts a single value, but the TLS
handshake can list multiple curves in the groups extension (the
extension has been renamed to contain more than elliptic curves).
This changes the GUC to accept a colon-separated list of curves.
This commit also renames the GUC to ssl_groups to match the new
nomenclature for the TLS extension.

Original patch by Erica Zhang with additional hacking by me.

Author: Erica Zhang <ericazhangy2021@qq.com>
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/tencent_063F89FA72CCF2E48A0DF5338841988E9809@qq.com
2024-10-24 15:20:28 +02:00
Daniel Gustafsson
6c66b7443c Raise the minimum supported OpenSSL version to 1.1.1
Commit a70e01d430 retired support for OpenSSL 1.0.2 in order to get
rid of the need for manual initialization of the library.  This left our
API usage compatible with 1.1.0 which was defined as the minimum required
version. Also mention that 3.4 is the minimum version required when using
LibreSSL.

An upcoming commit will introduce support for configuring TLSv1.3 cipher
suites which require an API call in OpenSSL 1.1.1 and onwards.  In order
to support this setting this commit will set v1.1.1 as the new minimum
required version.  The version-specific call for randomness init added
in commit c3333dbc0c is removed as it's no longer needed.

Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/909A668B-06AD-47D1-B8EB-A164211AAD16@yesql.se
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/tencent_063F89FA72CCF2E48A0DF5338841988E9809@qq.com
2024-10-24 15:20:19 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov
e546989a26 Add 'no_error' argument to pg_wal_replay_wait()
This argument allow skipping throwing an error.  Instead, the result status
can be obtained using pg_wal_replay_wait_status() function.

Catversion is bumped.

Reported-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZtUF17gF0pNpwZDI%40paquier.xyz
Reviewed-by: Pavel Borisov
2024-10-24 15:02:21 +03:00
Jeff Davis
0a3f983821 Another documentation fixup.
Reported-by: Erik Rijkers
2024-10-23 10:28:31 -07:00
Jeff Davis
07d00692c8 Documentation fixup.
Wrong return type for pg_clear_attribute_stats().

Author: Noriyoshi Shinoda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DM4PR84MB17347944F27A552F0CCDF84CEE4C2@DM4PR84MB1734.NAMPRD84.PROD.OUTLOOK.COM
2024-10-23 09:44:36 -07:00
Daniel Gustafsson
17b4aa77c3 doc: Fix INSERT statement syntax for identity columns
The INSERT statements in the examples were erroneously using
VALUE instead of VALUES. Backpatch to v17 where the examples
were added through a37bb7c139.

Reported-by: shixiong327926@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172958472112.696.6075270400394560263@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 17
2024-10-23 14:58:17 +02:00
Jeff Davis
ce207d2a79 Add functions pg_set_attribute_stats() and pg_clear_attribute_stats().
Enable manipulation of attribute statistics. Only superficial
validation is performed, so it's possible to add nonsense, and it's up
to the planner (or other users of statistics) to behave reasonably in
that case.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=eErgzn7ECDpwFcptJKOk9SxZEk5Pot4d94eVTZsvj3gw@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-22 15:06:55 -07:00
Jeff Davis
dbe6bd4343 Change pg_*_relation_stats() functions to return type to void.
These functions will either raise an ERROR or run to normal
completion, so no return value is necessary.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=cBF8rnphuTyHFi3KYzB9ByDgx57HwK9Rz2yp7S+Om87w@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-22 12:48:01 -07:00
Álvaro Herrera
f1c141fe14
Note that index_name in ALTER INDEX ATTACH PARTITION can be schema-qualified
Missed in 8b08f7d4820f; backpatch to all supported branches.

Reported-by: alvaro@datadoghq.com
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172924785099.698.15236991344616673753@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2024-10-20 15:36:20 +02:00
Jeff Davis
b391d882ff Allow pg_set_relation_stats() to set relpages to -1.
While the default value for relpages is 0, if a partitioned table with
at least one child has been analyzed, then the partititoned table will
have a relpages value of -1.

Author: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=fajh1Lpcyr_XsMmq-9Z=SGk-u+_Zeac7Pt0RAN3uiVCg@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-18 10:44:15 -07:00
Nathan Bossart
9e2d813d59 Adjust documentation for configuring Linux huge pages.
The present wording about viewing shared_memory_size_in_huge_pages
seems to suggest that the parameter cannot be viewed after startup
at all, whereas the intent is to make it clear that you can't use
"postgres -C" to view this parameter while the server is running.
This commit rephrases this section to remove the ambiguity.

Author: Seino Yuki
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, David G. Johnston, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/420584fd274f9ec4f337da55ffb3b790%40oss.nttdata.com
Backpatch-through: 15
2024-10-18 10:20:15 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
04bec894a0 initdb: Change default to using data checksums.
Checksums are now on by default.  They can be disabled by the
previously added option --no-data-checksums.

Author: Greg Sabino Mullane <greg@turnstep.com>
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart <nathandbossart@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAKAnmmKwiMHik5AHmBEdf5vqzbOBbcwEPHo4-PioWeAbzwcTOQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-16 08:48:10 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
67846550dc doc: Fix initdb option xreflabels
Generally, we don't want any overriding xreflabels in the options
list, so that we can link to options and the link renders as the
option name.  The -g option did this differently and config.sgml made
use of that for a link.  The new --no-data-checksums option (commit
983a588e0b) apparently copied this pattern, but that seems like the
wrong direction, as a future patch revealed.

To fix, remove the two xreflabels and rewrite the link in config.sgml
with an explicit link text.
2024-10-16 08:28:12 +02:00
Masahiko Sawada
7cdfeee320 Add contrib/pg_logicalinspect.
This module provides SQL functions that allow to inspect logical
decoding components.

It currently allows to inspect the contents of serialized logical
snapshots of a running database cluster, which is useful for debugging
or educational purposes.

Author: Bertrand Drouvot
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Shveta Malik, Peter Smith, Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZscuZ92uGh3wm4tW%40ip-10-97-1-34.eu-west-3.compute.internal
2024-10-14 17:22:02 -07:00
Daniel Gustafsson
40f4f2fa65 doc: Add anchors for COPY format descriptions
When answering support questions online it's helpful to be able to
refer to the specific format by using an anchored link.

Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87edatit3t.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2024-10-14 10:15:33 +02:00
Jeff Davis
e839c8ecc9 Create functions pg_set_relation_stats, pg_clear_relation_stats.
These functions are used to tweak statistics on any relation, provided
that the user has MAINTAIN privilege on the relation, or is the database
owner.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=eErgzn7ECDpwFcptJKOk9SxZEk5Pot4d94eVTZsvj3gw@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-11 16:55:11 -07:00
Nathan Bossart
4e1fad3787 Add pg_ls_summariesdir().
This function returns the name, size, and last modification time of
each regular file in pg_wal/summaries.  This allows administrators
to grant privileges to view the contents of this directory without
granting privileges on pg_ls_dir(), which allows listing the
contents of many other directories.  This commit also gives the
pg_monitor predefined role EXECUTE privileges on the new
pg_ls_summariesdir() function.

Bumps catversion.

Author: Yushi Ogiwara
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a0a3af15a9b9daa107739eb45aa9a9bc%40oss.nttdata.com
2024-10-11 11:02:09 -05:00
Michael Paquier
cf54a2c002 pg_stat_statements: Add columns to track parallel worker activity
The view pg_stat_statements gains two columns:
- parallel_workers_to_launch, the number of parallel workers planned to
be launched.
- parallel_workers_launched, the number of parallel workers actually
launched.

The ratio of both columns offers hints that parallel workers are lacking
on a per-statement basis, requiring some tuning, in coordination with
"calls", the number of times a query is executed.

As of now, these numbers are tracked within Gather and GatherMerge
nodes.  They could be extended to utilities that make use of parallel
workers (parallel btree and brin, VACUUM).

The module is bumped to 1.12.

Author: Guillaume Lelarge
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAECtzeWtTGOK0UgKXdDGpfTVSa5bd_VbUt6K6xn8P7X+_dZqKw@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-09 08:30:45 +09:00
Tom Lane
2d24fd942c Add min and max aggregates for bytea type.
Similar to a0f1fce80, although we chose to duplicate logic
rather than invoke byteacmp, primarily to avoid repeat detoasting.

Marat Buharov, Aleksander Alekseev

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPCEVGXiASjodos4P8pgyV7ixfVn-ZgG9YyiRZRbVqbGmfuDyg@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-08 13:52:14 -04:00
Tatsuo Ishii
5b7da5c261 Doc: add check to detect non-breaking spaces in the docs.
There were multiple instances where accidentally adding non-breaking
space (nbsp, U+00A0, 0xc2a0 in UTF-8) to sgml files. This commit adds
additional checking to detect nbsp. You can check the nbsp by:

make -C doc/src/sgml check

or

make -C doc/src/sgml check-nbsp

Authors: Yugo Nagata, Daniel Gustafsson
Reviewed-by: Tatsuo Ishii, Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240930.153404.202479334310259810.ishii%40postgresql.org
2024-10-08 20:25:18 +09:00
Fujii Masao
4ac2a9bece Add REJECT_LIMIT option to the COPY command.
Previously, when ON_ERROR was set to 'ignore', the COPY command
would skip all rows with data type conversion errors, with no way to
limit the number of skipped rows before failing.

This commit introduces the REJECT_LIMIT option, allowing users to
specify the maximum number of erroneous rows that can be skipped.
If more rows encounter data type conversion errors than allowed by
REJECT_LIMIT, the COPY command will fail with an error, even when
ON_ERROR = 'ignore'.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Junwang Zhao, Kirill Reshke, jian he, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/63f99327aa6b404cc951217fa3e61fe4@oss.nttdata.com
2024-10-08 18:19:58 +09:00
Daniel Gustafsson
6ae387eb63 doc: Quote value in SET NAMES documentation
The value passed to SET NAMES should be wrapped in single quotes.

Reported-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxG3EoUsbX4ZoMFkWrvBJcSCbPjdpRvPhuQN65fADc3mFg@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-07 11:50:39 +02:00
Michael Paquier
e09fff7c98 doc: Add minimal C and SQL example to add a custom table AM handler
The documentation was rather sparse on this matter and there is no
extension in-core that shows how to do it.  Adding a small example will
hopefully help newcomers.  An advantage of writing things this way is
that the contents are not going to rot because of backend changes.

Author: Phil Eaton
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Fabrízio de Royes Mello
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAByiw+r+CS-ojBDP7Dm=9YeOLkZTXVnBmOe_ajK=en8C_zB3_g@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-07 15:47:40 +09:00
Fujii Masao
a1c4c8a9e1 file_fdw: Add on_error and log_verbosity options to file_fdw.
In v17, the on_error and log_verbosity options were introduced for
the COPY command. This commit extends support for these options
to file_fdw.

Setting on_error = 'ignore' for a file_fdw foreign table allows users
to query it without errors, even when the input file contains
malformed rows, by skipping the problematic rows.

Both on_error and log_verbosity options apply to SELECT and ANALYZE
operations on file_fdw foreign tables.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ab59dad10490ea3734cf022b16c24cfd@oss.nttdata.com
2024-10-03 15:57:32 +09:00
Fujii Masao
e7834a1a25 Add log_verbosity = 'silent' support to COPY command.
Previously, when the on_error option was set to ignore, the COPY command
would always log NOTICE messages for input rows discarded due to
data type incompatibility. Users had no way to suppress these messages.

This commit introduces a new log_verbosity setting, 'silent',
which prevents the COPY command from emitting NOTICE messages
when on_error = 'ignore' is used, even if rows are discarded.
This feature is particularly useful when processing malformed files
frequently, where a flood of NOTICE messages can be undesirable.

For example, when frequently loading malformed files via the COPY command
or querying foreign tables using file_fdw (with an upcoming patch to
add on_error support for file_fdw), users may prefer to suppress
these messages to reduce log noise and improve clarity.

Author: Atsushi Torikoshi
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ab59dad10490ea3734cf022b16c24cfd@oss.nttdata.com
2024-10-03 15:55:37 +09:00
Michael Paquier
e2bab2d792 Remove support for unlogged on partitioned tables
The following commands were allowed on partitioned tables, with
different effects:
1) ALTER TABLE SET [UN]LOGGED did not issue an error, and did not update
pg_class.relpersistence.
2) CREATE UNLOGGED TABLE was working with pg_class.relpersistence marked
as initially defined, but partitions did not inherit the UNLOGGED
property, which was confusing.

This commit causes the commands mentioned above to fail for partitioned
tables, instead.

pg_dump is tweaked so as partitioned tables marked as UNLOGGED ignore
the option when dumped from older server versions.  pgbench needs a
tweak for --unlogged and --partitions=N to ignore the UNLOGGED option on
the partitioned tables created, its partitions still being unlogged.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Nathan Bossart
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZiiyGFTBNkqcMQi_@paquier.xyz
2024-10-03 10:55:02 +09:00
Daniel Gustafsson
7b2822ecf9 doc: Missing markup, punctuation and wordsmithing
Various improvements to the documentation like adding missing
markup, improving punctuation, ensuring consistent spelling of
words and minor wordsmithing.

Author: Oleg Sibiryakov <o.sibiryakov@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b7d0a03c-107e-48c7-a5c9-2c6f73cdf78f@postgrespro.ru
2024-10-02 14:50:56 +02:00
Daniel Gustafsson
94902b146f doc: Add link to login event trigger example
The login event trigger is not listed on the trigger firing matrix
since it's not fired by a command.  Add a link to the example code
page similar to how the other event triggers link to the matrix.

Reported-by: Marcos Pegoraro <marcos@f10.com.br>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-JLwYS+78rX02BZ3wJ9ykVrd2i3O1K+7jzvZKQ0evquyQiLQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-02 12:24:39 +02:00
Fujii Masao
17cc5f666f Fix inconsistent reporting of checkpointer stats.
Previously, the pg_stat_checkpointer view and the checkpoint completion
log message could show different numbers for buffers written
during checkpoints. The view only counted shared buffers,
while the log message included both shared and SLRU buffers,
causing inconsistencies.

This commit resolves the issue by updating both the view and the log message
to separately report shared and SLRU buffers written during checkpoints.
A new slru_written column is added to the pg_stat_checkpointer view
to track SLRU buffers, while the existing buffers_written column now
tracks only shared buffers. This change would help users distinguish
between the two types of buffers, in the pg_stat_checkpointer view and
the checkpoint complete log message, respectively.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Nitin Jadhav
Reviewed-by: Bharath Rupireddy, Michael Paquier, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Robert Haas
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, vignesh C, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMm1aWb18EpT0whJrjG+-nyhNouXET6ZUw0pNYYAe+NezpvsAA@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-02 11:17:47 +09:00
Michael Paquier
506eede711 doc: Clarify name of files generated by pg_waldump --save-fullpage
The fork name is always separated with the block number by an underscore
in the names of the files generated, but the docs stuck them together
without a separator, which was confusing.

Author: Christoph Berg
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZvxtSLiix9eceMRM@msg.df7cb.de
Backpatch-through: 16
2024-10-02 11:12:40 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
983a588e0b initdb: Add new option "--no-data-checksums"
Right now this does nothing except override any earlier
--data-checksums option.  But the idea is that --data-checksums could
become the default, and then this option would allow forcing it off
instead.

Author: Greg Sabino Mullane <greg@turnstep.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAKAnmmKwiMHik5AHmBEdf5vqzbOBbcwEPHo4-PioWeAbzwcTOQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-01 10:50:30 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
efd72a3d42 Tweak docs to reduce possible impact of data checksums
Author: Greg Sabino Mullane <greg@turnstep.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAKAnmmKwiMHik5AHmBEdf5vqzbOBbcwEPHo4-PioWeAbzwcTOQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-10-01 09:58:20 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
972c2cd288 jit: Require at least LLVM 14, if enabled.
Remove support for LLVM versions 10-13.  The default on all non-EOL'd
OSes represented in our build farm will be at least LLVM 14 when
PostgreSQL 18 ships.

Author: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGLhNs5geZaVNj2EJ79Dx9W8fyWUU3HxcpZy55sMGcY%3DiA%40mail.gmail.com
2024-10-01 04:49:11 -04:00
Daniel Gustafsson
1b4d52c355 doc: Mention the connstring key word for PGSERVICE
The documentation for the connection service file was mentioning
the environment variable early but not the connection string key
word until the last sentence and only then in an example.  This
adds the keyword in the first paragraph to make it clearer

Author: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker <ilmari@ilmari.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87r09ibpke.fsf@wibble.ilmari.org
2024-10-01 10:20:14 +02:00
Tatsuo Ishii
3b1a377def Doc: replace unnecessary non-breaking space with ordinal space.
There were unnecessary non-breaking spaces (nbsp, U+00A0, 0xc2a0 in
UTF-8) in the docs.  This commit replaces them with ASCII spaces
(0x20).

config.sgml is backpatched through 17.
ref/drop_extension.sgml is backpatched through 13.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240930.153404.202479334310259810.ishii%40postgresql.org
Reviewed-by: Yugo Nagata, Daniel Gustafsson
Backpatch-through: 17, 13
2024-10-01 11:34:34 +09:00
Tom Lane
7702337489 Do not treat \. as an EOF marker in CSV mode for COPY IN.
Since backslash is (typically) not special in CSV data, we should
not be treating \. as special either.  The server historically did
this to keep CSV and TEXT modes more alike and to support V2 protocol;
but V2 protocol is long dead, and the inconsistency with CSV standards
is annoying.  Remove that behavior in CopyReadLineText, and make some
minor consequent code simplifications.

On the client side, we need to fix psql so that it does not check
for \. except when reading data from STDIN (that is, the script
source).  We must do that regardless of TEXT/CSV mode or there is
no way to end the COPY short of script EOF.  Also, be careful
not to send the \. to the server in that case.

This is a small compatibility break in that other applications
beside psql may need similar adjustment.  Also, using an older
version of psql with a v18 server may result in misbehavior
during CSV-mode COPY IN.

Daniel Vérité, reviewed by vignesh C, Robert Haas, and myself

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ed659f37-a9dd-42a7-82b9-0da562cc4006@manitou-mail.org
2024-09-30 17:57:12 -04:00
Fujii Masao
a19f83f879 docs: Enhance the pg_stat_checkpointer view documentation.
This commit updates the documentation for the pg_stat_checkpointer view
to clarify what kind of checkpoints or restartpoints each counter tracks.
This makes it easier to understand the meaning of each counter.

Previously, the num_requested description included "backend,"
which could be misleading since requests come from other sources as well.
This commit also removes "backend" from the description of num_requested,
to avoid confusion.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Anton A. Melnikov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4640258e-d959-4cf0-903c-cd02389c3e05@oss.nttdata.com
2024-10-01 02:01:57 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
4dea33ce76
Don't disallow DROP of constraints ONLY on partitioned tables
This restriction seems to have come about due to some fuzzy thinking: in
commit 9139aa1942 we were adding a restriction against ADD constraint
ONLY on partitioned tables (which is sensible) and apparently we thought
the DROP case had to be symmetrical.  However, it isn't, and the
comments about it are mistaken about the effect it would have.  Remove
this limitation.

There have been no reports of users bothered by this limitation, so I'm
not backpatching it just yet.  We can revisit this decision later, as needed.

Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/202409261752.nbvlawkxsttf@alvherre.pgsql
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7682253a-6f79-6a92-00aa-267c4c412870@lab.ntt.co.jp
	(about commit 9139aa1942, previously not registered)
2024-09-30 11:58:13 +02:00
Fujii Masao
559efce1d6 Add num_done counter to the pg_stat_checkpointer view.
Checkpoints can be skipped when the server is idle. The existing num_timed and
num_requested counters in pg_stat_checkpointer track both completed and
skipped checkpoints, but there was no way to count only the completed ones.

This commit introduces the num_done counter, which tracks only completed
checkpoints, making it easier to see how many were actually performed.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Anton A. Melnikov
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9ea77f40-818d-4841-9dee-158ac8f6e690@oss.nttdata.com
2024-09-30 11:56:05 +09:00
Nathan Bossart
d8ebcac547 doc: Note that CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW restricts search_path.
Since v17, CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW has set search_path to
"pg_catalog, pg_temp" while running the query.  The docs for the
other commands that restrict search_path mention it, but the page
for CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW does not.  Fix that.

Oversight in commit 4b74ebf726.

Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed-by: Jeff Davis
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240805160502.d2a4975802a832b1e04afb80%40sraoss.co.jp
Backpatch-through: 17
2024-09-27 16:21:21 -05:00
Robert Haas
8dfd312902 pg_verifybackup: Verify tar-format backups.
This also works for compressed tar-format backups. However, -n must be
used, because we use pg_waldump to verify WAL, and it doesn't yet know
how to verify WAL that is stored inside of a tarfile.

Amul Sul, reviewed by Sravan Kumar and by me, and revised by me.
2024-09-27 08:40:24 -04:00
Tom Lane
147bbc90f7 Modernize to_char's Roman-numeral code, fixing overflow problems.
int_to_roman() only accepts plain "int" input, which is fine since
we're going to produce '###############' for any value above 3999
anyway.  However, the numeric and int8 variants of to_char() would
throw an error if the given input exceeded the integer range, while
the float-input variants invoked undefined-per-C-standard behavior.
Fix things so that you uniformly get '###############' for out of
range input.

Also add test cases covering this code, plus the equally-untested
EEEE, V, and PL format codes.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2956175.1725831136@sss.pgh.pa.us
2024-09-26 11:02:31 -04:00
Tom Lane
e3a92ab070 Doc: InitPlans aren't parallel-restricted any more.
Commit e08d74ca1 removed that restriction, but missed updating
the documentation about it.  Noted by Egor Rogov.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cdc8f87b-a378-4e22-6d29-40ae32dd97d1@postgrespro.ru
2024-09-26 10:37:51 -04:00
Amit Kapila
d66572d9fe Doc: Add a note in the upgrade of logical replication clusters.
The steps used to upgrade the cluster first upgraded the publisher node
but ideally, any node could be upgraded first.

Author: Vignesh C
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm1_iDO6srWzntqTr0ZDVkk2whVhNKEWAvtgZBfSmuBeZQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm3Y-M+kAqr_mf=_C1kNwAB-cS6S5hTHnKMEqDw4sGEh4Q@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-26 16:14:07 +05:30
Amit Kapila
7fdeaf5774 Doc: Add the steps for upgrading the logical replication cluster.
Author: Vignesh C
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Amit Kapila, Hayato Kuroda, Bharath Rupireddy
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALDaNm1_iDO6srWzntqTr0ZDVkk2whVhNKEWAvtgZBfSmuBeZQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-25 10:06:10 +05:30
David Rowley
62ddf7ee9a Add ONLY support for VACUUM and ANALYZE
Since autovacuum does not trigger an ANALYZE for partitioned tables,
users must perform these manually.  However, performing a manual ANALYZE
on a partitioned table would always result in recursively analyzing each
partition and that could be undesirable as autovacuum takes care of that.
For partitioned tables that contain a large number of partitions, having
to analyze each partition could take an unreasonably long time, especially
so for tables with a large number of columns.

Here we allow the ONLY keyword to prefix the name of the table to allow
users to have ANALYZE skip processing partitions.  This option can also
be used with VACUUM, but there is no work to do if VACUUM ONLY is used on
a partitioned table.

This commit also changes the behavior of VACUUM	and ANALYZE for
inheritance parents.  Previously inheritance child tables would not be
processed when operating on the parent.  Now, by default we *do* operate
on the child tables.  ONLY can be used to obtain the old behavior.
The release notes should note this as an incompatibility.  The default
behavior has not changed for partitioned tables as these always
recursively processed the partitions.

Author: Michael Harris <harmic@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADofcAWATx_haD=QkSxHbnTsAe6+e0Aw8Eh4H8cXyogGvn_kOg@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADofcAXVbD0yGp_EaC9chmzsOoSai3jcfBCnyva3j0RRdRvMVA@mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Jelte Fennema-Nio <postgres@jeltef.nl>
Reviewed-by: Melih Mutlu <m.melihmutlu@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Atsushi Torikoshi <torikoshia@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: David Rowley <dgrowleyml@gmail.com>
2024-09-24 18:03:40 +12:00
Tom Lane
a2ebf3274a Doc: explain how to test ADMIN privilege with pg_has_role().
This has always been possible, but the syntax is a bit obscure,
and our user-facing docs were not very helpful.  Spell it out
more clearly.

Per complaint from Dominique Devienne.  Back-patch to
all supported branches.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFCRh-8JNEy+dV4SXFOrWca50u+d=--TO4cq=+ac1oBtfJy4AA@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-20 15:56:34 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
658fc6c6af doc PG relnotes: remove warning about commit links in PDF build
Make paragraph empty instead of removing it.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2029579.1726779139@sss.pgh.pa.us

Backpatch-through: 12
2024-09-19 18:05:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
c6b1506f71 doc PG relnotes: document "Unresolved ID reference found" cause
Backpatch-through: 12
2024-09-19 12:01:59 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
25f8cf19ab doc PG relnotes: rename commit link paragraph for clarity
FYI, during PDF builds, this link type generates a "Unresolved ID
reference found" warning because it is suppressed from the PDF output.

Backpatch-through: 12
2024-09-19 09:47:22 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
8a6e85b46e doc PG relnotes: add paragraph explaining the section symbol
And suppress the symbol in print mode, where the section symbol does not
appear.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZuobILbmGGetxEg5@momjian.us

Backpatch-through: 12
2024-09-18 17:13:19 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
f986882ffd doc PG relnotes: no relnote footnotes for commit links in PDF
In print output, there are too many commit links for footnotes in the
release notes to be useful.

Reported-by: Tom Lane

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1709858.1726618961@sss.pgh.pa.us

Backpatch-through: 12
2024-09-18 16:34:52 -04:00
Fujii Masao
a7c39db5eb docs: Improve the description of num_timed column in pg_stat_checkpointer.
The previous documentation stated that num_timed reflects the number of
scheduled checkpoints performed. However, checkpoints may be skipped
if the server has been idle, and num_timed counts both skipped and completed
checkpoints. This commit clarifies the description to make it clear that
the counter includes both skipped and completed checkpoints.

Back-patch to v17 where pg_stat_checkpointer was added.

Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9ea77f40-818d-4841-9dee-158ac8f6e690@oss.nttdata.com
2024-09-19 02:14:10 +09:00
Fujii Masao
4f08ab5545 postgres_fdw: Extend postgres_fdw_get_connections to return user name.
This commit adds a "user_name" output column to
the postgres_fdw_get_connections function, returning the name
of the local user mapped to the foreign server for each connection.
If a public mapping is used, it returns "public."

This helps identify postgres_fdw connections more easily,
such as determining which connections are invalid, closed,
or used within the current transaction.

No extension version bump is needed, as commit c297a47c5f
already handled it for v18~.

Author: Hayato Kuroda
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b492a935-6c7e-8c08-e485-3c1d64d7d10f@oss.nttdata.com
2024-09-18 12:51:48 +09:00
Tom Lane
918e21d251 Repair pg_upgrade for identity sequences with non-default persistence.
Since we introduced unlogged sequences in v15, identity sequences
have defaulted to having the same persistence as their owning table.
However, it is possible to change that with ALTER SEQUENCE, and
pg_dump tries to preserve the logged-ness of sequences when it doesn't
match (as indeed it wouldn't for an unlogged table from before v15).

The fly in the ointment is that ALTER SEQUENCE SET [UN]LOGGED fails
in binary-upgrade mode, because it needs to assign a new relfilenode
which we cannot permit in that mode.  Thus, trying to pg_upgrade a
database containing a mismatching identity sequence failed.

To fix, add syntax to ADD/ALTER COLUMN GENERATED AS IDENTITY to allow
the sequence's persistence to be set correctly at creation, and use
that instead of ALTER SEQUENCE SET [UN]LOGGED in pg_dump.  (I tried to
make SET [UN]LOGGED work without any pg_dump modifications, but that
seems too fragile to be a desirable answer.  This way should be
markedly faster anyhow.)

In passing, document the previously-undocumented SEQUENCE NAME option
that pg_dump also relies on for identity sequences; I see no value
in trying to pretend it doesn't exist.

Per bug #18618 from Anthony Hsu.
Back-patch to v15 where we invented this stuff.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18618-d4eb26d669ed110a@postgresql.org
2024-09-17 15:53:35 -04:00
Alexander Korotkov
85b98b8d5a Minor cleanup related to pg_wal_replay_wait() procedure
* Rename $node_standby1 to $node_standby in 043_wal_replay_wait.pl as there
   is only one standby.
 * Remove useless debug printing in 043_wal_replay_wait.pl.
 * Fix typo in one check description in 043_wal_replay_wait.pl.
 * Fix some wording in comments and documentation.

Reported-by: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1d7b08f2-64a2-77fb-c666-c9a74c68eeda%40gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Alexander Lakhin
2024-09-17 22:50:43 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
89f908a6d0 Add temporal FOREIGN KEY contraints
Add PERIOD clause to foreign key constraint definitions.  This is
supported for range and multirange types.  Temporal foreign keys check
for range containment instead of equality.

This feature matches the behavior of the SQL standard temporal foreign
keys, but it works on PostgreSQL's native ranges instead of SQL's
"periods", which don't exist in PostgreSQL (yet).

Reference actions ON {UPDATE,DELETE} {CASCADE,SET NULL,SET DEFAULT}
are not supported yet.

(previously committed as 34768ee361, reverted by 8aee330af55; this is
essentially unchanged from those)

Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-17 11:29:30 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
fc0438b4e8 Add temporal PRIMARY KEY and UNIQUE constraints
Add WITHOUT OVERLAPS clause to PRIMARY KEY and UNIQUE constraints.
These are backed by GiST indexes instead of B-tree indexes, since they
are essentially exclusion constraints with = for the scalar parts of
the key and && for the temporal part.

(previously committed as 46a0cd4cef, reverted by 46a0cd4cefb; the new
part is this:)

Because 'empty' && 'empty' is false, the temporal PK/UQ constraint
allowed duplicates, which is confusing to users and breaks internal
expectations.  For instance, when GROUP BY checks functional
dependencies on the PK, it allows selecting other columns from the
table, but in the presence of duplicate keys you could get the value
from any of their rows.  So we need to forbid empties.

This all means that at the moment we can only support ranges and
multiranges for temporal PK/UQs, unlike the original patch (above).
Documentation and tests for this are added.  But this could
conceivably be extended by introducing some more general support for
the notion of "empty" for other types.

Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-17 11:29:30 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
7406ab623f Add stratnum GiST support function
This is support function 12 for the GiST AM and translates
"well-known" RT*StrategyNumber values into whatever strategy number is
used by the opclass (since no particular numbers are actually
required).  We will use this to support temporal PRIMARY
KEY/UNIQUE/FOREIGN KEY/FOR PORTION OF functionality.

This commit adds two implementations, one for internal GiST opclasses
(just an identity function) and another for btree_gist opclasses.  It
updates btree_gist from 1.7 to 1.8, adding the support function for
all its opclasses.

(previously committed as 6db4598fcb, reverted by 8aee330af55; this is
essentially unchanged from those)

Author: Paul A. Jungwirth <pj@illuminatedcomputing.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: jian he <jian.universality@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+renyUApHgSZF9-nd-a0+OPGharLQLO=mDHcY4_qQ0+noCUVg@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-17 11:29:29 +02:00
Nathan Bossart
40e2e5e92b Introduce framework for parallelizing various pg_upgrade tasks.
A number of pg_upgrade steps require connecting to every database
in the cluster and running the same query in each one.  When there
are many databases, these steps are particularly time-consuming,
especially since they are performed sequentially, i.e., we connect
to a database, run the query, and process the results before moving
on to the next database.

This commit introduces a new framework that makes it easy to
parallelize most of these once-in-each-database tasks by processing
multiple databases concurrently.  This framework manages a set of
slots that follow a simple state machine, and it uses libpq's
asynchronous APIs to establish the connections and run the queries.
The --jobs option is used to determine the number of slots to use.
To use this new task framework, callers simply need to provide the
query and a callback function to process its results, and the
framework takes care of the rest.  A more complete description is
provided at the top of the new task.c file.

None of the eligible once-in-each-database tasks are converted to
use this new framework in this commit.  That will be done via
several follow-up commits.

Reviewed-by: Jeff Davis, Robert Haas, Daniel Gustafsson, Ilya Gladyshev, Corey Huinker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240516211638.GA1688936%40nathanxps13
2024-09-16 16:10:33 -05:00
Bruce Momjian
d891c49286 doc PG relnotes: fix SGML markup for new commit links
Backpatch-through: 12
2024-09-16 14:23:39 -04:00
Tom Lane
b8ea0f675f Run regression tests with timezone America/Los_Angeles.
Historically we've used timezone "PST8PDT", but the recent release
2024b of tzdb changes the definition of that zone in a way that
breaks many test cases concerned with dates before 1970.  Although
we've not yet adopted 2024b into our own tree, this is already
problematic for people using --with-system-tzdata if their platform
has already adopted 2024b.  To work with both older and newer
versions of tzdb, switch to using "America/Los_Angeles", accepting
the ensuing changes in regression test results.

Back-patch to all supported branches.

Per report and patch from Wolfgang Walther.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0a997455-5aba-4cf2-a354-d26d8bcbfae6@technowledgy.de
2024-09-14 17:55:02 -04:00
Amit Langote
2b67bdca52 SQL/JSON: Update example in JSON_QUERY() documentation
Commit e6c45d85dc fixed the behavior of JSON_QUERY() when WITH
CONDITIONAL WRAPPER is used, but the documentation example wasn't
updated to reflect this change. This commit updates the example to
show the correct result.

Per off-list report from Andreas Ulbrich.

Backpatch-through: 17
2024-09-13 16:10:14 +09:00
Tom Lane
cb599b9ddf Make jsonpath .string() be immutable for datetimes.
Discussion of commit ed055d249 revealed that we don't actually
want jsonpath's .string() method to depend on DateStyle, nor
TimeZone either, because the non-"_tz" jsonpath functions are
supposed to be immutable.  Potentially we could allow a TimeZone
dependency in the "_tz" variants, but it seems better to just
uniformly define this method as returning the same string that
jsonb text output would do.  That's easier to implement too,
saving a couple dozen lines.

Patch by me, per complaint from Peter Eisentraut.  Back-patch
to v17 where this feature came in (in 66ea94e8e).  Also
back-patch ed055d249 to provide test cases.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5e8879d0-a3c8-4be2-950f-d83aa2af953a@eisentraut.org
2024-09-12 14:30:29 -04:00
Fujii Masao
4eada203a5 Add has_largeobject_privilege function.
This function checks whether a user has specific privileges on a large object,
identified by OID. The user can be provided by name, OID,
or default to the current user. If the specified large object doesn't exist,
the function returns NULL. It raises an error for a non-existent user name.
This behavior is basically consistent with other privilege inquiry functions
like has_table_privilege.

Bump catalog version.

Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240702163444.ab586f6075e502eb84f11b1a@sranhm.sraoss.co.jp
2024-09-12 21:51:26 +09:00
David Rowley
5bb9ba2739 Doc: alphabetize aggregate function table
A few recent JSON aggregates have been added without much consideration
to the existing order.  Put these back in alphabetical order (with the
exception of the JSONB variant of each JSON aggregate).

Author: Wolfgang Walther <walther@technowledgy.de>
Reviewed-by: Marlene Reiterer <marlene.reiterer.03@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6a7b910c-3feb-4006-b817-9b4759cb6bb6%40technowledgy.de
Backpatch-through: 16, where these aggregates were added
2024-09-12 22:36:39 +12:00
Magnus Hagander
280423300b pg_createsubscriber: minor documentation fixes 2024-09-11 16:30:17 +02:00
Tom Lane
ed055d249d Improve documentation and testing of jsonpath string() for datetimes.
Point out that the output format depends on DateStyle, and test that,
along with testing some cases previously not covered.

In passing, adjust the horology test to verify that the prevailing
DateStyle is 'Postgres, MDY', much as it has long verified the
prevailing TimeZone.  We expect pg_regress to have set these up,
and there are multiple regression tests relying on these settings.

Also make the formatting of entries in table 9.50 more consistent.

David Wheeler (marginal additional hacking by me); review by jian he

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/56955B33-6959-4FDA-A459-F00363ECDFEE@justatheory.com
2024-09-10 14:48:13 -04:00
Peter Eisentraut
56fead44dc Add amgettreeheight index AM API routine
The only current implementation is for btree where it calls
_bt_getrootheight().  Other index types can now also use this to pass
information to their amcostestimate routine.  Previously, btree was
hardcoded and other index types could not hook into the optimizer at
this point.

Author: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/E72EAA49-354D-4C2E-8EB9-255197F55330@enterprisedb.com
2024-09-10 10:03:23 +02:00
Tom Lane
218527d014 Don't bother checking the result of SPI_connect[_ext] anymore.
SPI_connect/SPI_connect_ext have not returned any value other than
SPI_OK_CONNECT since commit 1833f1a1c in v10; any errors are thrown
via ereport.  (The most likely failure is out-of-memory, which has
always been thrown that way, so callers had better be prepared for
such errors.)  This makes it somewhat pointless to check these
functions' result, and some callers within our code haven't been
bothering; indeed, the only usage example within spi.sgml doesn't
bother.  So it's likely that the omission has propagated into
extensions too.

Hence, let's standardize on not checking, and document the return
value as historical, while not actually changing these functions'
behavior.  (The original proposal was to change their return type
to "void", but that would needlessly break extensions that are
conforming to the old practice.)  This saves a small amount of
boilerplate code in a lot of places.

Stepan Neretin

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMaYL5Z9Uk8cD9qGz9QaZ2UBJFOu7jFx5Mwbznz-1tBbPDQZow@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-09 12:18:34 -04:00
Robert Haas
cdb6b0fdb0 Add PQfullProtocolVersion() to surface the precise protocol version.
The existing function PQprotocolVersion() does not include the minor
version of the protocol.  In preparation for pending work that will
bump that number for the first time, add a new function to provide it
to clients that may care, using the (major * 10000 + minor)
convention already used by PQserverVersion().

Jacob Champion based on earlier work by Jelte Fennema-Nio

Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAOYmi+mM8+6Swt1k7XsLcichJv8xdhPnuNv7-02zJWsezuDL+g@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-09 11:54:55 -04:00
Amit Kapila
6c2b5edecc Collect statistics about conflicts in logical replication.
This commit adds columns in view pg_stat_subscription_stats to show the
number of times a particular conflict type has occurred during the
application of logical replication changes. The following columns are
added:

confl_insert_exists:
        Number of times a row insertion violated a NOT DEFERRABLE unique
        constraint.
confl_update_origin_differs:
        Number of times an update was performed on a row that was
        previously modified by another origin.
confl_update_exists:
        Number of times that the updated value of a row violates a
        NOT DEFERRABLE unique constraint.
confl_update_missing:
        Number of times that the tuple to be updated is missing.
confl_delete_origin_differs:
        Number of times a delete was performed on a row that was
        previously modified by another origin.
confl_delete_missing:
        Number of times that the tuple to be deleted is missing.

The update_origin_differs and delete_origin_differs conflicts can be
detected only when track_commit_timestamp is enabled.

Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Shveta Malik, Peter Smith, Anit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB57160A07BD575773045FC214948F2@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2024-09-04 08:55:21 +05:30
Michael Paquier
4236825197 Fix typos and grammar in code comments and docs
Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f7e514cf-2446-21f1-a5d2-8c089a6e2168@gmail.com
2024-09-03 14:49:04 +09:00
Daniel Gustafsson
94eec79633 doc: Consistently use result set in documentation
We use "result set" in all other places so let's be consistent
across the entire documentation.

Reported-by: grantgryczan@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172187924855.915373.15595156724215203822@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2024-09-02 18:36:57 +02:00
Daniel Gustafsson
a70e01d430 Remove support for OpenSSL older than 1.1.0
OpenSSL 1.0.2 has been EOL from the upstream OpenSSL project for
some time, and is no longer the default OpenSSL version with any
vendor which package PostgreSQL. By retiring support for OpenSSL
1.0.2 we can remove a lot of no longer required complexity for
managing state within libcrypto which is now handled by OpenSSL.

Reviewed-by: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter@eisentraut.org>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZG3JNursG69dz1lr@paquier.xyz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+hUKGKh7QrYzu=8yWEUJvXtMVm_CNWH1L_TLWCbZMwbi1XP2Q@mail.gmail.com
2024-09-02 13:51:48 +02:00
Masahiko Sawada
d7613ea72f Clarify restrict_nonsystem_relation_kind description.
This change improves the description of the
restrict_nonsystem_relation_kind parameter in guc_table.c and the
documentation for better clarity.

Backpatch to 12, where this GUC parameter was introduced.

Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6a96f1af-22b4-4a80-8161-1f26606b9ee2%40eisentraut.org
Backpatch-through: 12
2024-08-30 15:06:09 -07:00
Amit Kapila
640178c92e Rename the conflict types for the origin differ cases.
The conflict types 'update_differ' and 'delete_differ' indicate that a row
to be modified was previously altered by another origin. Rename those to
'update_origin_differs' and 'delete_origin_differs' to clarify their
meaning.

Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Shveta Malik, Peter Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1+HEKwG_UYt4Zvwh5o_HoCKCjEGesRjJX38xAH3OxuuYA@mail.gmail.com
2024-08-29 09:12:12 +05:30
Amit Kapila
9d90e2bdaf Doc: Fix the ambiguity in the description of failover slots.
The failover slots ensure a seamless transition of a subscriber after the
standby is promoted. But the docs for it also explain the behavior of
asynchronous replication which can confuse the readers.

Reported-by: Masahiro Ikeda
Backpatch-through: 17
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS3PR01MB6390B660F4198BB9745E0526B18B2@OS3PR01MB6390.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2024-08-29 08:56:52 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
6654bb9204 Add prefetching support on macOS
macOS doesn't have posix_fadvise(), but fcntl() with the F_RDADVISE
command does the same thing.

Some related documentation has been generalized to not mention
posix_advise() specifically anymore.

Reviewed-by: Thomas Munro <thomas.munro@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/0827edec-1317-4917-a186-035eb1e3241d%40eisentraut.org
2024-08-28 07:28:27 +02:00
Alexander Korotkov
3890d90c15 Revert support for ALTER TABLE ... MERGE/SPLIT PARTITION(S) commands
This commit reverts 1adf16b8fb, 87c21bb941, and subsequent fixes and
improvements including df64c81ca9, c99ef1811a, 9dfcac8e15, 885742b9f8,
842c9b2705, fcf80c5d5f, 96c7381c4c, f4fc7cb54b, 60ae37a8bc, 259c96fa8f,
449cdcd486, 3ca43dbbb6, 2a679ae94e, 3a82c689fd, fbd4321fd5, d53a4286d7,
c086896625, 4e5d6c4091, 04158e7fa3.

The reason for reverting is security issues related to repeatable name lookups
(CVE-2014-0062).  Even though 04158e7fa3 solved part of the problem, there
are still remaining issues, which aren't feasible to even carefully analyze
before the RC deadline.

Reported-by: Noah Misch, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240808171351.a9.nmisch%40google.com
Backpatch-through: 17
2024-08-24 18:48:48 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
6e8a0317b4 pg_createsubscriber: Message style improvements 2024-08-24 15:56:32 +02:00
Amit Kapila
edcb712585 Doc: explain the log format of logical replication conflicts.
This commit adds a detailed explanation of the log format for logical
replication conflicts.

Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Shveta Malik, Peter Smith, Hayato Kuroda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB5716352552DFADB8E9AD1D8994C92@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB57162EDE8BA17F3EE08A24CA948D2@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2024-08-22 14:11:50 +05:30
Michael Paquier
d55322b0da psql: Add more meta-commands able to use the extended protocol
Currently, only unnamed prepared statement are supported by psql with
the meta-command \bind.  With only this command, it is not possible to
test named statement creation, execution or close through the extended
protocol.

This commit introduces three additional commands:
* \parse creates a prepared statement using the extended protocol,
acting as a wrapper of libpq's PQsendPrepare().
* \bind_named binds and executes an existing prepared statement using
the extended protocol, for PQsendQueryPrepared().
* \close closes an existing prepared statement using the extended
protocol, for PQsendClosePrepared().

This is going to be useful to add regression tests for the extended
query protocol, and I have some plans for that on separate threads.
Note that \bind relies on PQsendQueryParams().

The code of psql is refactored so as bind_flag is replaced by an enum in
_psqlSettings that tracks the type of libpq routine to execute, based on
the meta-command involved, with the default being PQsendQuery().  This
refactoring piece has been written by me, while Anthonin has implemented
the rest.

Author: Anthonin Bonnefoy, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev, Jelte Fennema-Nio
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAO6_XqpSq0Q0kQcVLCbtagY94V2GxNP3zCnR6WnOM8WqXPK4nw@mail.gmail.com
2024-08-22 16:25:57 +09:00
Peter Eisentraut
4baff50132 doc: remove llvm-config search from configure documentation
As of 4dd29b6833, we no longer attempt to locate any other llvm-config
variant than plain llvm-config in configure-based builds; update the
documentation accordingly. (For Meson-based builds, we still use Meson's
LLVMDependencyConfigTool [0], which runs through a set of possible
suffixes [1], so no need to update the documentation there.)

[0]: 7d28ff2939/mesonbuild/dependencies/dev.py (L184)
[1]: 7d28ff2939/mesonbuild/environment.py (L183)

Author: Ole Peder Brandtzæg <olebra@samfundet.no>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/20240518224601.gtisttjerylukjr5%40samfundet.no
2024-08-21 15:11:21 +02:00
Amit Kapila
d43b8bb6b8 Fix typos in 9758174e2e.
Reported off-list by Erik Rijkers
2024-08-21 16:45:36 +05:30
Alvaro Herrera
678a8358d1
Minor wording change in table "JSON Creation Functions"
For readability.  Backpatch to 16.

Author: Erik Wienhold <ewie@ewie.name>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8ddac732-d650-4958-b9c9-ea8e6116251e@ewie.name
2024-08-20 17:53:40 -04:00
John Naylor
4d93bbd4e0 Document limit on the number of out-of-line values per table
Document the hard limit stemming from the size of an OID, and also
mention the perfomance impact that occurs before the hard limit
is reached.

Jakub Wartak and Robert Haas
Backpatch to all supported versions

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKZiRmwWhp2yxjqJLwbBjHdfbJBcUmmKMNAZyBjjtpgM9AMatQ%40mail.gmail.com
2024-08-20 13:36:33 +07:00
Amit Kapila
9758174e2e Log the conflicts while applying changes in logical replication.
This patch provides the additional logging information in the following
conflict scenarios while applying changes:

insert_exists: Inserting a row that violates a NOT DEFERRABLE unique constraint.
update_differ: Updating a row that was previously modified by another origin.
update_exists: The updated row value violates a NOT DEFERRABLE unique constraint.
update_missing: The tuple to be updated is missing.
delete_differ: Deleting a row that was previously modified by another origin.
delete_missing: The tuple to be deleted is missing.

For insert_exists and update_exists conflicts, the log can include the origin
and commit timestamp details of the conflicting key with track_commit_timestamp
enabled.

update_differ and delete_differ conflicts can only be detected when
track_commit_timestamp is enabled on the subscriber.

We do not offer additional logging for exclusion constraint violations because
these constraints can specify rules that are more complex than simple equality
checks. Resolving such conflicts won't be straightforward. This area can be
further enhanced if required.

Author: Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Shveta Malik, Amit Kapila, Nisha Moond, Hayato Kuroda, Dilip Kumar
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB5716352552DFADB8E9AD1D8994C92@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2024-08-20 08:35:11 +05:30
Bruce Momjian
9380e5f129 doc: improve create/alter sequence CYCLE syntax
Reported-by: Peter Smith

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHut+PtqwZwPfGq62xq2614_ce2ejDmbB9CfP+a1azxpneFRBQ@mail.gmail.com

Author: Peter Smith

Backpatch-through: master
2024-08-19 20:18:03 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
e28a2719be doc: mention of postpostgres_fdw INSERT ON CONFLICT limitation
Reported-by: Fujii Masao

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/47801526-d017-4c89-9f52-c02c449a139b@oss.nttdata.com

Author: Fujii Masao

Backpatch-through: master
2024-08-19 19:54:39 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
cf3bb26204 doc: clarify create database in start docs uses command line
Reported-by: vrms@netcologne.de

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172251463564.915373.17748961617119647662@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: master
2024-08-19 19:22:10 -04:00
Bruce Momjian
6467993fb5 doc: Improve vague pg_createsubscriber description
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZqX_4J-nFTQtmj6K@momjian.us

Author: Euler Taveira

Backpatch-through: 17
2024-08-19 18:27:22 -04:00
Tomas Vondra
0d06a7eac4 Document that search_path is reported by the server
Commit 28a1121fd9 marked search_path as GUC_REPORT, but failed to
update the relevant places in docs. There are two places listing the GUC
options reported to the client, so update both.

Reported-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFh8B=k8s7WrcqhafmYhdN1+E5LVzZi_QaYDq8bKvrGJTAhY2Q@mail.gmail.com
2024-08-19 19:52:37 +02:00
Michael Paquier
a5f4ff6c80 doc: Fix typo in section for custom pgstats
Per offline report from Erik Rijkers.
2024-08-19 07:53:47 +09:00
Bruce Momjian
03e9b958ee docs: fix incorrect plpgsql error message
Change "$1" to "username".

Reported-by: philipp.salvisberg@gmail.com

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172112109590.736590.12219129462878821880@wrigleys.postgresql.org

Backpatch-through: 12
2024-08-16 22:50:54 -04:00
Tom Lane
6be39d77a7 Fix extraction of week and quarter fields from intervals.
"EXTRACT(WEEK FROM interval_value)" formerly threw an error.
Define it as "tm->tm_mday / 7".  (With C99 division semantics,
this gives consistent results for negative intervals.)

"EXTRACT(QUARTER FROM interval_value)" has been implemented
all along, but it formerly gave extremely strange results for
negative intervals.  Fix it so that the output for -N months
is the negative of the output for N months.

Per bug #18348 from Michael Bondarenko and subsequent discussion.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18348-b097a3587dfde8a4@postgresql.org
2024-08-16 12:35:53 -04:00
Jeff Davis
a3c6aa42ee Fix doc typo: unicode_assigned() return type.
Reported-by: Hironobu SUZUKI
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5dd88820-bb00-4b90-904b-738ea2e4ee2e@interdb.jp
Backpatch-through: 17
2024-08-14 19:07:09 -07:00
Peter Eisentraut
c8e2d422fd Remove TRACE_SORT macro
The TRACE_SORT macro guarded the availability of the trace_sort GUC
setting.  But it has been enabled by default ever since it was
introduced in PostgreSQL 8.1, and there have been no reports that
someone wanted to disable it.  So just remove the macro to simplify
things.  (For the avoidance of doubt: The trace_sort GUC is still
there.  This only removes the rarely-used macro guarding it.)

Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/be5f7162-7c1d-44e3-9a78-74dcaa6529f2%40eisentraut.org
2024-08-14 08:07:52 +02:00
Nathan Bossart
760162fedb Add user-callable CRC functions.
We've had code for CRC-32 and CRC-32C for some time (for WAL
records, etc.), but there was no way for users to call it, despite
apparent popular demand.  The new crc32() and crc32c() functions
accept bytea input and return bigint (to avoid returning negative
values).

Bumps catversion.

Author: Aleksander Alekseev
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TNMTGnqnG%3DyXXUQh9E88JDckmR45H2Q%2B%3DucaCLMOW1QQw%40mail.gmail.com
2024-08-12 10:35:06 -05:00
David Rowley
f0d1127595 Remove "parent" column from pg_backend_memory_contexts
32d3ed816 added the "path" column to pg_backend_memory_contexts to allow
a stable method of obtaining the parent MemoryContext of a given row in
the view.  Using the "path" column is now the preferred method of
obtaining the parent row.

Previously, any queries which were self-joining to this view using the
"name" and "parent" columns could get incorrect results due to the fact
that names are not unique.  Here we aim to explicitly break such queries
so that they can be corrected and use the "path" column instead.

It is possible that there are more innocent users of the parent column
that just need an indication of the parent and having to write out a
self-joining CTE may be an unnecessary hassle for those cases.  Let's
remove the column for now and see if anyone comes back with any
complaints.  This does seem like a good time to attempt to get rid of
the column as we still have around 1 year to revert this if someone comes
back with a valid complaint.  Plus this view is new to v14 and is quite
niche, so perhaps not many people will be affected.

Author: Melih Mutlu <m.melihmutlu@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGPVpCT7NOe4fZXRL8XaoxHpSXYTu6GTpULT_3E-HT9hzjoFRA@mail.gmail.com
2024-08-12 15:42:16 +12:00
Alexander Korotkov
867d396ccd Adjust pg_wal_replay_wait() procedure behavior on promoted standby
pg_wal_replay_wait() is intended to be called on standby.  However, standby
can be promoted to primary at any moment, even concurrently with the
pg_wal_replay_wait() call.  If recovery is not currently in progress
that doesn't mean the wait was unsuccessful.  Thus, we always need to recheck
if the target LSN is replayed.

Reported-by: Kevin Hale Boyes
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdu5QN%2BZGACS%2B7foxmr8_nekgA2PA%2B-G3BuOUrdBLBFb6Q%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov
2024-08-10 21:43:02 +03:00
Nathan Bossart
7fceb5725b doc: Standardize use of dashes in references to CRC and SHA.
Presently, we inconsistently use dashes in references to these
algorithms (e.g., CRC32C versus CRC-32C).  Some popular web sources
appear to prefer dashes, and with this commit, we will, too.

Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZrUFpLP-w2zTAHqq%40nathan
2024-08-09 13:16:33 -05:00
Nathan Bossart
8c3548613d doc: Fix name of CRC algorithm in "Reliability" section.
This section claims we use CRC-32 for WAL records and two-phase
state files, but we've actually used CRC-32C since v9.5 (commit
5028f22f6e).  Fix that.

Reviewed-by: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ZrUFpLP-w2zTAHqq%40nathan
Backpatch-through: 12
2024-08-09 10:52:37 -05:00
Peter Eisentraut
7da1bdc2c2 Remove obsolete RECHECK keyword completely
This used to be part of CREATE OPERATOR CLASS and ALTER OPERATOR
FAMILY, but it has done nothing (except issue a NOTICE) since
PostgreSQL 8.4.  Commit 30e7c175b8 removed support for dumping from
pre-9.2 servers, so this no longer serves any need.

This now removes it completely, and you'd get a normal parse error if
you used it.

Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <aleksander@timescale.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/113ef2d2-3657-4353-be97-f28fceddbca1%40eisentraut.org
2024-08-09 07:18:51 +02:00
Noah Misch
e56ccc8e42 Fix names of "Visual Studio" and Meson in a documentation sentence.
Commit 3cffe7946c missed this.  Back-patch
to v17, which introduced this.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TM7ct0EjoCQaLSVYoxxnEw4xCUFebWj77GktWsqEdyCtQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-08-07 11:43:08 -07:00
Masahiko Sawada
66e94448ab Restrict accesses to non-system views and foreign tables during pg_dump.
When pg_dump retrieves the list of database objects and performs the
data dump, there was possibility that objects are replaced with others
of the same name, such as views, and access them. This vulnerability
could result in code execution with superuser privileges during the
pg_dump process.

This issue can arise when dumping data of sequences, foreign
tables (only 13 or later), or tables registered with a WHERE clause in
the extension configuration table.

To address this, pg_dump now utilizes the newly introduced
restrict_nonsystem_relation_kind GUC parameter to restrict the
accesses to non-system views and foreign tables during the dump
process. This new GUC parameter is added to back branches too, but
these changes do not require cluster recreation.

Back-patch to all supported branches.

Reviewed-by: Noah Misch
Security: CVE-2024-7348
Backpatch-through: 12
2024-08-05 06:05:33 -07:00
Michael Paquier
75534436a4 injection_points: Add some cumulative stats for injection points
This acts as a template of what can be achieved with the pluggable
cumulative stats APIs introduced in 7949d95945 for the
variable-numbered case where stats entries are stored in the pgstats
dshash, while being potentially useful on its own for injection points,
say to add starting and/or stopping conditions based on the statistics
(want to trigger a callback after N calls, for example?).

Currently, the only data gathered is the number of times an injection
point is run.  More fields can always be added as required.  All the
routines related to the stats are located in their own file, called
injection_stats.c in the test module injection_points, for clarity.

The stats can be used only if the test module is loaded through
shared_preload_libraries.  The key of the dshash uses InvalidOid for the
database, and an int4 hash of the injection point name as object ID.

A TAP test is added to provide coverage for the new custom cumulative
stats APIs, showing the persistency of the data across restarts, for
example.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Dmitry Dolgov, Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zmqm9j5EO0I4W8dx@paquier.xyz
2024-08-05 12:06:54 +09:00
Alexander Korotkov
8036d73ae3 pg_wal_replay_wait(): Fix typo in the doc
Reported-by: Kevin Hale Boyes
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADAecHWKpaPuPGXAMOH%3DwmhTpydHWGPOk9KWX97UYhp5GdqCWw%40mail.gmail.com
2024-08-04 20:26:48 +03:00
Michael Paquier
7949d95945 Introduce pluggable APIs for Cumulative Statistics
This commit adds support in the backend for $subject, allowing
out-of-core extensions to plug their own custom kinds of cumulative
statistics.  This feature has come up a few times into the lists, and
the first, original, suggestion came from Andres Freund, about
pg_stat_statements to use the cumulative statistics APIs in shared
memory rather than its own less efficient internals.  The advantage of
this implementation is that this can be extended to any kind of
statistics.

The stats kinds are divided into two parts:
- The in-core "builtin" stats kinds, with designated initializers, able
to use IDs up to 128.
- The "custom" stats kinds, able to use a range of IDs from 128 to 256
(128 slots available as of this patch), with information saved in
TopMemoryContext.  This can be made larger, if necessary.

There are two types of cumulative statistics in the backend:
- For fixed-numbered objects (like WAL, archiver, etc.).  These are
attached to the snapshot and pgstats shmem control structures for
efficiency, and built-in stats kinds still do that to avoid any
redirection penalty.  The data of custom kinds is stored in a first
array in snapshot structure and a second array in the shmem control
structure, both indexed by their ID, acting as an equivalent of the
builtin stats.
- For variable-numbered objects (like tables, functions, etc.).  These
are stored in a dshash using the stats kind ID in the hash lookup key.

Internally, the handling of the builtin stats is unchanged, and both
fixed and variabled-numbered objects are supported.  Structure
definitions for builtin stats kinds are renamed to reflect better the
differences with custom kinds.

Like custom RMGRs, custom cumulative statistics can only be loaded with
shared_preload_libraries at startup, and must allocate a unique ID
shared across all the PostgreSQL extension ecosystem with the following
wiki page to avoid conflicts:
https://wiki.postgresql.org/wiki/CustomCumulativeStats

This makes the detection of the stats kinds and their handling when
reading and writing stats much easier than, say, allocating IDs for
stats kinds from a shared memory counter, that may change the ID used by
a stats kind across restarts.  When under development, extensions can
use PGSTAT_KIND_EXPERIMENTAL.

Two examples that can be used as templates for fixed-numbered and
variable-numbered stats kinds will be added in some follow-up commits,
with tests to provide coverage.

Some documentation is added to explain how to use this plugin facility.

Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Dmitry Dolgov, Bertrand Drouvot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/Zmqm9j5EO0I4W8dx@paquier.xyz
2024-08-04 19:41:24 +09:00
Noah Misch
3cffe7946c Fix name of "Visual Studio" in documentation.
Back-patch to v17, which introduced this.

Aleksander Alekseev

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJ7c6TM7ct0EjoCQaLSVYoxxnEw4xCUFebWj77GktWsqEdyCtQ@mail.gmail.com
2024-08-02 12:49:56 -07:00
Alexander Korotkov
3c5db1d6b0 Implement pg_wal_replay_wait() stored procedure
pg_wal_replay_wait() is to be used on standby and specifies waiting for
the specific WAL location to be replayed.  This option is useful when
the user makes some data changes on primary and needs a guarantee to see
these changes are on standby.

The queue of waiters is stored in the shared memory as an LSN-ordered pairing
heap, where the waiter with the nearest LSN stays on the top.  During
the replay of WAL, waiters whose LSNs have already been replayed are deleted
from the shared memory pairing heap and woken up by setting their latches.

pg_wal_replay_wait() needs to wait without any snapshot held.  Otherwise,
the snapshot could prevent the replay of WAL records, implying a kind of
self-deadlock.  This is why it is only possible to implement
pg_wal_replay_wait() as a procedure working without an active snapshot,
not a function.

Catversion is bumped.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/eb12f9b03851bb2583adab5df9579b4b%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Kartyshov Ivan, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Peter Eisentraut, Dilip Kumar, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Alexander Lakhin, Bharath Rupireddy, Euler Taveira
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas, Kyotaro Horiguchi
2024-08-02 21:16:56 +03:00
Peter Eisentraut
c671e142bf pg_createsubscriber: Rename option --socket-directory to --socketdir
For consistency with the equivalent option in pg_upgrade.

Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda <kuroda.hayato@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Euler Taveira <euler@eulerto.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1ed82b9b-8e20-497d-a2f8-aebdd793d595%40eisentraut.org
2024-08-01 12:14:01 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
a292c98d62 Convert node test compile-time settings into run-time parameters
This converts

    COPY_PARSE_PLAN_TREES
    WRITE_READ_PARSE_PLAN_TREES
    RAW_EXPRESSION_COVERAGE_TEST

into run-time parameters

    debug_copy_parse_plan_trees
    debug_write_read_parse_plan_trees
    debug_raw_expression_coverage_test

They can be activated for tests using PG_TEST_INITDB_EXTRA_OPTS.

The compile-time symbols are kept for build farm compatibility, but
they now just determine the default value of the run-time settings.

Furthermore, support for these settings is not compiled in at all
unless assertions are enabled, or the new symbol
DEBUG_NODE_TESTS_ENABLED is defined at compile time, or any of the
legacy compile-time setting symbols are defined.  So there is no
run-time overhead in production builds.  (This is similar to the
handling of DISCARD_CACHES_ENABLED.)

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/30747bd8-f51e-4e0c-a310-a6e2c37ec8aa%40eisentraut.org
2024-08-01 10:09:18 +02:00
David Rowley
057ee9183c Doc: mention executor memory usage for enable_partitionwise* GUCs
Prior to this commit, the docs for enable_partitionwise_aggregate and
enable_partitionwise_join mentioned the additional overheads enabling
these causes for the query planner, but they mentioned nothing about the
possible surge in work_mem-consuming executor nodes that could end up in
the final plan.  Dimitrios reported the OOM killer intervened on his
query as a result of using enable_partitionwise_aggregate=on.

Here we adjust the docs to mention the possible increase in the number of
work_mem-consuming executor nodes that can appear in the final plan as a
result of enabling these GUCs.

Reported-by: Dimitrios Apostolou
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3603c380-d094-136e-e333-610914fb3e80%40gmx.net
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAApHDvoZ0_yqwPFEpb6h261L76BUpmh5GxBQq0LeRzQ5Jh3zzg@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12, oldest supported version
2024-08-01 01:25:25 +12:00
Peter Eisentraut
e54a42ac9d Add API and ABI stability guidance to the C language docs
Includes guidance for major and minor version releases, and sets
reasonable expectations for extension developers to follow.

Author: David Wheeler, Peter Eisentraut

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/5DA9F9D2-B8B2-43DE-BD4D-53A4160F6E8D%40justatheory.com
2024-07-31 11:11:09 +02:00
Peter Eisentraut
4f29394ea9 doc: Avoid too prominent use of "backup" on pg_dump man page
Some users inadvertently rely on pg_dump as their primary backup tool,
when better solutions exist.  The pg_dump man page is arguably
misleading in that it starts with

"pg_dump is a utility for backing up a PostgreSQL database."

This tones this down a little bit, by replacing most uses of "backup"
with "export" and adding a short note that pg_dump is not a
general-purpose backup tool.

Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/70b48475-7706-4268-990d-fd522b038d96%40eisentraut.org
2024-07-31 07:57:47 +02:00
Thomas Munro
8138526136 Remove --disable-atomics, require 32 bit atomics.
Modern versions of all relevant architectures and tool chains have
atomics support.  Since edadeb07, there is no remaining reason to carry
code that simulates atomic flags and uint32 imperfectly with spinlocks.
64 bit atomics are still emulated with spinlocks, if needed, for now.

Any modern compiler capable of implementing C11 <stdatomic.h> must have
the underlying operations we need, though we don't require C11 yet.  We
detect certain compilers and architectures, so hypothetical new systems
might need adjustments here.

Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> (concept, not the patch)
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (concept, not the patch)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3351991.1697728588%40sss.pgh.pa.us
2024-07-30 22:58:57 +12:00
Thomas Munro
e25626677f Remove --disable-spinlocks.
A later change will require atomic support, so it wouldn't make sense
for a hypothetical new system not to be able to implement spinlocks.

Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas <hlinnaka@iki.fi>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us> (concept, not the patch)
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de> (concept, not the patch)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3351991.1697728588%40sss.pgh.pa.us
2024-07-30 22:58:37 +12:00
Tom Lane
da4017a694 Doc: fix text's description of regexp_replace's arguments.
Section 9.7.3 had a syntax synopsis for regexp_replace()
that was different from Table 9.10's, but still wrong.
Update that one too.  Oversight in 580f8727c.

Jian He

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxG3NFKKsh6x4fRLv8h3V-HvN4W5dA=zNKMxsNcDwOKang@mail.gmail.com
2024-07-27 15:38:54 -04:00
Nathan Bossart
0dcaea5690 Introduce num_os_semaphores GUC.
The documentation for System V IPC parameters provides complicated
formulas to determine the appropriate values for SEMMNI and SEMMNS.
Furthermore, these formulas have often been wrong because folks
forget to update them (e.g., when adding a new auxiliary process).

This commit introduces a new runtime-computed GUC named
num_os_semaphores that reports the number of semaphores needed for
the configured number of allowed connections, worker processes,
etc.  This new GUC allows us to simplify the formulas in the
documentation, and it should help prevent future inaccuracies.
Like the other runtime-computed GUCs, users can view it with
"postgres -C" before starting the server, which is useful for
preconfiguring the necessary operating system resources.

Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Sami Imseih, Andres Freund, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20240517164452.GA1914161%40nathanxps13
2024-07-26 15:28:55 -05:00
Tom Lane
5d1d8b3c82 Clarify error message and documentation related to typed tables.
We restrict typed tables (those declared as "OF composite_type")
to be based on stand-alone composite types, not composite types
that are the implicitly-created rowtypes of other tables.
But if you tried to do that, you got the very confusing error
message "type foo is not a composite type".  Provide a more specific
message for that case.  Also clarify related documentation in the
CREATE TABLE man page.

Erik Wienhold and David G. Johnston, per complaint from Hannu Krosing.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMT0RQRysCb_Amy5CTENSc5GfsvXL1a4qX3mv_hx31_v74P==g@mail.gmail.com
2024-07-26 12:39:45 -04:00
Fujii Masao
857df3cef7 postgres_fdw: Add connection status check to postgres_fdw_get_connections().
This commit extends the postgres_fdw_get_connections() function
to check if connections are closed. This is useful for detecting closed
postgres_fdw connections that could prevent successful transaction
commits. Users can roll back transactions immediately upon detecting
closed connections, avoiding unnecessary processing of failed
transactions.

This feature is available only on systems supporting the non-standard
POLLRDHUP extension to the poll system call, including Linux.

Author: Hayato Kuroda
Reviewed-by: Shinya Kato, Zhihong Yu, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Andres Freund
Reviewed-by: Onder Kalaci, Takamichi Osumi, Vignesh C, Tom Lane, Ted Yu
Reviewed-by: Katsuragi Yuta, Peter Smith, Shubham Khanna, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TYAPR01MB58662809E678253B90E82CE5F5889@TYAPR01MB5866.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
2024-07-26 22:16:39 +09:00
Fujii Masao
c297a47c5f postgres_fdw: Add "used_in_xact" column to postgres_fdw_get_connections().
This commit extends the postgres_fdw_get_connections() function to
include a new used_in_xact column, indicating whether each connection
is used in the current transaction.

This addition is particularly useful for the upcoming feature that
will check if connections are closed. By using those information,
users can verify if postgres_fdw connections used in a transaction
remain open. If any connection is closed, the transaction cannot
be committed successfully. In this case users can roll back it
immediately without waiting for transaction end.

The SQL API for postgres_fdw_get_connections() is updated by
this commit and may change in the future. To handle compatibility
with older SQL declarations, an API versioning system is introduced,
allowing the function to behave differently based on the API version.

Author: Hayato Kuroda
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/be9382f7-5072-4760-8b3f-31d6dffa8d62@oss.nttdata.com
2024-07-26 22:15:51 +09:00
Heikki Linnakangas
20e0e7da9b Add test for early backend startup errors
The new test tests the libpq fallback behavior on an early error,
which was fixed in the previous commit.

This adds an IS_INJECTION_POINT_ATTACHED() macro, to allow writing
injected test code alongside the normal source code. In principle, the
new test could've been implemented by an extra test module with a
callback that sets the FrontendProtocol global variable, but I think
it's more clear to have the test code right where the injection point
is, because it has pretty intimate knowledge of the surrounding
context it runs in.

Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAOYmi%2Bnwvu21mJ4DYKUa98HdfM_KZJi7B1MhyXtnsyOO-PB6Ww%40mail.gmail.com
2024-07-26 15:12:21 +03:00
Fujii Masao
284c030a10 doc: Enhance documentation for postgres_fdw_get_connections() output columns.
The documentation previously described the output columns of
postgres_fdw_get_connections() in text format, which was manageable
for the original two columns. However, upcoming patches will add
new columns, making text descriptions less readable.

This commit updates the documentation to use a table format,
making it easier for users to understand each output column.

Author: Fujii Masao, Hayato Kuroda
Reviewed-by: Hayato Kuroda
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d04aae8d-05f5-42f4-a263-b962334d9f75@oss.nttdata.com
2024-07-26 20:47:05 +09:00
Tom Lane
c7301c3b6f Doc: fix misleading syntax synopses for targetlists.
In the syntax synopses for SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, etc,
SELECT ... and RETURNING ... targetlists were missing { ... }
braces around an OR (|) operator.  That allows misinterpretation
which could lead to confusion.

David G. Johnston, per gripe from masondeanm@aol.com.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172193970148.915373.2403176471224676074@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2024-07-25 19:52:08 -04:00
Tom Lane
e458dc1ac8 Doc: update some HTTP links to point to canonical URLs.
These aren't actually broken at present, but we might as well
avoid redirects.

Joel Jacobson

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8ccc96c7-0515-491b-be98-cfacdaeda815@app.fastmail.com
2024-07-25 16:38:28 -04:00
Robert Haas
744ddc6c6a Document restrictions regarding incremental backups and standbys.
If you try to take an incremental backup on a standby and there hasn't
been much system activity, it might fail. Document why this happens.
Also add a hint to the error message you get, to make it more likely
that users will understand what has gone wrong.

Laurenz Albe and Robert Haas

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5468641ad821dad7aa3b2d65bf843146443a1b68.camel@cybertec.at
2024-07-25 15:45:06 -04:00
Tom Lane
580f8727ca Add argument names to the regexp_XXX functions.
This change allows these functions to be called using named-argument
notation, which can be helpful for readability, particularly for
the ones with many arguments.

There was considerable debate about exactly which names to use,
but in the end we settled on the names already shown in our
documentation table 9.10.

The citext extension provides citext-aware versions of some of
these functions, so add argument names to those too.

In passing, fix table 9.10's syntax synopses for regexp_match,
which were slightly wrong about which combinations of arguments
are allowed.

Jian He, reviewed by Dian Fay and others

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACJufxG3NFKKsh6x4fRLv8h3V-HvN4W5dA=zNKMxsNcDwOKang@mail.gmail.com
2024-07-25 14:51:46 -04:00
David Rowley
32d3ed8165 Add path column to pg_backend_memory_contexts view
"path" provides a reliable method of determining the parent/child
relationships between memory contexts.  Previously this could be done in
a non-reliable way by writing a recursive query and joining the "parent"
and "name" columns.  This wasn't reliable as the names were not unique,
which could result in joining to the wrong parent.

To make this reliable, "path" stores an array of numerical identifiers
starting with the identifier for TopLevelMemoryContext.  It contains an
element for each intermediate parent between that and the current context.

Incompatibility: Here we also adjust the "level" column to make it
1-based rather than 0-based.  A 1-based level provides a convenient way
to access elements in the "path" array. e.g. path[level] gives the
identifier for the current context.

Identifiers are not stable across multiple evaluations of the view.  In
an attempt to make these more stable for ad-hoc queries, the identifiers
are assigned breadth-first.  Contexts closer to TopLevelMemoryContext
are less likely to change between queries and during queries.

Author: Melih Mutlu <m.melihmutlu@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGPVpCThLyOsj3e_gYEvLoHkr5w=tadDiN_=z2OwsK3VJppeBA@mail.gmail.com
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Stephen Frost, Atsushi Torikoshi,
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Robert Haas, David Rowley
2024-07-25 15:03:28 +12:00
Michael Paquier
b8aa44fd4f doc: Decorate psql page with application markup tags
Noticed while looking at this area of the documentation for a separate
patch.
2024-07-25 10:59:49 +09:00
Alvaro Herrera
9f21482fe1
Fix a missing article in the documentation
Per complaint from Grant Gryczan.

It's a very old typo; backpatch all the way back.

Author: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@cybertec.at>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172179789219.915368.16590585529628354757@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2024-07-24 14:13:55 +02:00
Amit Kapila
07fbecb87b Doc: Fix the mistakes in the subscription's failover option.
The documentation incorrectly stated that users could not alter the
subscription's failover option when the two-phase commit is enabled.

The steps to confirm that the standby server is ready for failover were
incorrect.

Author: Shveta Malik, Hou Zhijie
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/OS0PR01MB571657B72F8D75BD858DCCE394AD2@OS0PR01MB5716.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJpy0uBBk+OZXXqQ00Gai09XR+mDi2=9sMBYY0F+BedoFivaMA@mail.gmail.com
2024-07-24 14:24:45 +05:30
Amit Kapila
1462aad2e4 Allow altering of two_phase option of a SUBSCRIPTION.
The two_phase option is controlled by both the publisher (as a slot
option) and the subscriber (as a subscription option), so the slot option
must also be modified.

Changing the 'two_phase' option for a subscription from 'true' to 'false'
is permitted only when there are no pending prepared transactions
corresponding to that subscription. Otherwise, the changes of already
prepared transactions can be replicated again along with their corresponding
commit leading to duplicate data or errors.

To avoid data loss, the 'two_phase' option for a subscription can only be
changed from 'false' to 'true' once the initial data synchronization is
completed. Therefore this is performed later by the logical replication worker.

Author: Hayato Kuroda, Ajin Cherian, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Peter Smith, Hou Zhijie, Amit Kapila, Vitaly Davydov, Vignesh C
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8fab8-65d74c80-1-2f28e880@39088166
2024-07-24 10:13:36 +05:30
Peter Eisentraut
f68d85bf69 ldapurl is supported with simple bind
The docs currently imply that ldapurl is for search+bind only, but
that's not true.  Rearrange the docs to cover this better.

Add a test ldapurl with simple bind.  This was previously allowed but
unexercised, and now that it's documented it'd be good to pin the
behavior.

Improve error when mixing LDAP bind modes.  The option names had gone
stale; replace them with a more general statement.

Author: Jacob Champion <jacob.champion@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAOYmi+nyg9gE0LeP=xQ3AgyQGR=5ZZMkVVbWd0uR8XQmg_dd5Q@mail.gmail.com
2024-07-23 10:17:55 +02:00
Tom Lane
d2cba4f2cb Doc: improve description of plpgsql's FETCH and MOVE commands.
We were not being clear about which variants of the "direction"
clause are permitted in MOVE.  Also, the text seemed to be
written with only the FETCH/MOVE NEXT case in mind, so it
didn't apply very well to other variants.

Also, document that "MOVE count IN cursor" only works if count
is a constant.  This is not the whole truth, because some other
cases such as a parenthesized expression will also work, but
we want to push people to use "MOVE FORWARD count" instead.
The constant case is enough to cover what we allow in plain SQL,
and that seems sufficient to claim support for.

Update a comment in pl_gram.y claiming that we don't document
that point.

Per gripe from Philipp Salvisberg.

Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/172155553388.702.7932496598218792085@wrigleys.postgresql.org
2024-07-22 19:43:12 -04:00